0% found this document useful (0 votes)

1K views370 pages

Licht Hand Buch

The Lighting Handbook is your concise reference book - always ready to hand. 3rd edition, revised and updated, September 2011.

Uploaded by

Mochammad Sholichudin

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

1K views370 pages

Licht Hand Buch

The Lighting Handbook is your concise reference book - always ready to hand. 3rd edition, revised and updated, September 2011.

Uploaded by

Mochammad Sholichudin

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

The Lighting Handbook

Your concise reference book always ready to hand.

Chapter 1

Lighting technology and lighting application

Chapter 2

Standard values for indoor + outdoor lighting

Based on the new European standards Chapter 3

Products

Chapter 4

Lamps and ballasts

Chapter 5

Lighting and room management

Chapter 6

Quickplan calculating the n of lum. required

Chapter 7

Technical information

Chapter 8

Checklists

Chapter 9

Services

Chapter 10

Notes

Imprint: For questions and suggestions on the The Lighting Handbook: Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/ (0)5572/390-0 F +43/ (0)5572/22 826

3rd edition, revised and updated, September 2011

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 1

Lighting technology and lighting application

What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality characteristics of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The right light traditional and new quality criteria . . Illuminance definition of terminology . . . . . . . . . . Glare glare limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colour rendition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humanergy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) . . Visual performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vitality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empowerment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 45 4 5 5 5 68 6 67 7 8 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 18 17 17 17 18 18 19

What is light?
Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceived by our eyes.

What is light? Wavelength [m] 10

-10

What does the human eye see? Relative spectral brightness perception 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 Infrared Microwaves 0.2 350 450 550 650 750 Wavelength [nm] Wavelength [m] Night Day

Gamma rays X-rays Ultraviolet Light

10-5

100

Television, VSW Medium wave

105

Radio waves

By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in shades of grey.

2 / Chapter 1

The Lighting Handbook

Light has a triple effect: Light for visual functions illumination of task area in conformity with relevant standards glare-free and convenient Light creating biological effects supporting peoples biological rhythms stimulating and motivating Light for emotional perception pleasant lighting enhancing the interior design makes people relax and feel at ease

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 1 / 3

Basic parameters used in lighting

Luminous flux Luminous intensity Illuminance Luminance
Luminous ux

Lumen [lm] Luminous intensity I Illuminance E

Candela [lm/sr]=[cd] Luminance L L=

Lux [lm/m2]=[lx]

[lm/(sr*m2)]=[cd/m2]

solid angle into which luminous ux is emitted area hit by luminous ux visible areas of light source reectance of area 3.14 for diffuse surface areas

Abbreviation: Unit:

Phi Lumen

4 / Chapter 1

The Lighting Handbook

Luminous flux The luminous flux describes the quantity of light emitted by a light source. The luminous efficiency is the ratio of the luminous flux to the electrical power consumed (lm/W). It is a measure of a lamps economic efficiency.

Luminous intensity The luminous intensity describes the quantity of light that is radiated in a particular direction. This is a useful measurement for directive lighting elements such as reflectors. It is represented by the luminous intensity distribution curve (LDC).

Abbreviation: Unit:

I cd

Candela

Illuminance Illuminance describes the quantity of luminous flux falling on a surface. It decreases by the square of the distance (inverse square law). Relevant standards specify the required illuminance (e.g. EN 12464 Lighting of indoor workplaces). Illuminance: flux (lm) E(lx) = luminous 2 area (m )

Abbreviation: Unit:

E lx

Lux

Luminance Luminance is the only basic lighting parameter that is perceived by the eye. It specifies the brightness of a surface and is essentially dependent on its reflectance (finish and colour).
The Lighting Handbook

Abbreviation: Unit:

L cd/m2

Chapter 1 / 5

Quality characteristics of lighting

The right light traditional and new quality criteria
T R A D I T I O N A L

Harmonious brightness distribution Sufcient illumination level

Glare limitation Avoidance of reections

Good modelling Correct light colour Appropriate colour rendition

Quality criteria
Changing lighting situations Personal control Energy efciency Daylight integration Light as an interior design element

N E W

Chapter 1 / 9

Lighting technology
Under the new European standard for interior workplace lighting, EN 12464, (psychological) glare is assessed by the unified glare rating method (UGR), which is based on a formula for glare. It takes account of all the luminaires in a system contributing to the sensation of glare. UGR tables derived from this formula are provided by the manufacturers for glare rating. The Quickplan tables in Chapter 6 and the lighting catalogues contain reference values for specific room sizes. UGR = 8 log 0.25 Lb (1)

L2 P2 (2)

The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in the system that contribute to the glare sensation (2) as well as the brightness of walls and ceilings (1). It produces a UGR index. The two methods the one set out in DIN 5035 and the one defined in EN 12464 produce comparable results. UGR limits (UGRL), that must not be exceeded: 16 19 22 25 28 technical drawing reading, writing, training, meetings, computer-based work craft and light industries heavy industry railway platforms, foyers

10 / Chapter 1

The Lighting Handbook

Quality class for nominal illuminance (lx) A 1000 750 500 <300 1 2000 1500 1000 750 500 <300 2 2000 1000 500 <300 3 2000 1000 500 <300

8 6 4 3

a hs
1

The Lighting Handbook

The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined in DIN 5035 assesses the mean luminance of the luminaires across a beam angle of 45 to 85. The new European standard sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices, which is equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx in Quality class 1. Chapter 1 / 11

UGRL

8 103

3 4 5 6 8 104 2 Luminance L in cd/m2

3 4

Types of lighting

Direct lighting: highly directional strong glare reduction at certain angles dark ceiling (cave effect) limited flexibility of workstation layout energy efficiency on the task level

Indirect lighting: diffuse lighting conditions room gains in height glare-free workstations can be positioned anywhere low energy efficiency

Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI)

The Ergonomic Lighting Indicator (ELI) allows to assess lighting quality in terms of quantity, using five descriptive quality criteria. Checklists are used to record the individual criteria, which are displayed in a Kiviat graph (spider chart). The outermost line in the graph indicates optimum fulfilment of a criterion.

Visual performance

E
Empowerment

B
Vista

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart.

The Lighting Handbook

16 / Chapter 1

Visual performance Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that a visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance. lighting level uniformity of illuminance colour rendition avoiding hard shadows contrast rendition physiological glare Vista In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and make people accept the interior on account of the first visual impression they get. architectural design mental design guidance hierarchy of perception external appearance material luminaires protection type protection against harmful radiation Visual comfort Light is not only needed in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. balanced brightness distribution varying luminance levels plasticity/modelling discomfort glare uniform illuminance in area around visual task sense of security artificial light complemented by daylight use of flicker-free ballasts

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 1 / 17

Vitality Light significantly influences peoples activity and sense of wellbeing. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. sense of well-being activation and stimulation circadian rhythm lighting similar to daylight avoiding danger spots avoiding thermal radiation electromagnetic fields Empowerment Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence ones lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. individual influence by switching and dimming choice of lighting scene presence detection daylight-based control choice of lighting scenarios flexibility for layout changes privacy Use of the charts is described in Chapter 8 / 411 Checklists.

18 / Chapter 1

The Lighting Handbook

Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI)

The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) stands for a lighting installations actual energy consumption in kWh per square metre and year. LENI is calculated according to the normative specifications of the EN 15193 standard. Formula for calculating a lighting installations energy consumption:

{(Pn x FC) x {(tD x FO x FD) + (tN x FO)} [kWh/(year x m)] A Without elaborating on individual parameters in greater detail, the following relevant factors are identified: LENI =
the installed load (Pn) multiplied by the annual hours of use by day (tD) and at night (tN) reduced by factors ( 1) for daylight-based control (FD), presence-based control (FO) and use of a lighting control system (FC) the area assessed (A) LENI also takes charging energy for emergency lighting and standby energy into account. The following factors have a positive impact on the reduction of energy consumption: sensible control of lighting use of daylight use of presence detectors intelligent consideration of hours of use energy-efficient lamps need-based use of luminaires and lighting solutions, specified for the respective application constant lighting control (maintenance control)

60
The Lighting Handbook

120

0
Energy consumption in kWh/(m2 year)

180

Chapter 1 / 19

Chapter 2

Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting

Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting . . . . . . . Indoor workplaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings . . . . Industrial activities and crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retail premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Places of public assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Educational premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Health care premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transportational areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sports facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor workplaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General circulation areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filling service stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial sites and storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrochemical and other hazardous industries . . . . . Power, electricity, gas and heat plants . . . . . . . . . . . Railway and tramways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saw mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 3 12 3 37 7 8 8 89 9 10 11 11 12 13 15 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15

Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting
m gives the illuminance maintenance values specified in the European standards which partially or completely replace national standards (e.g. DIN 5035, Austrian standard O 1040, Swiss lighting standard SLG 8912, DIN 67526). Lighting of indoor workplaces, EN 12464-1 (April 2003; is currently being revised) Lighting of outdoor workplaces, EN 12464-2 (October 2007) Sports facility lighting, EN 12193 (April 2008) (see also Definition of terminology, Chapter 1 / 6) Illuminance levels must not fall below the m maintenance values in the visual task area. If the precise location is not known, the limit should be applied to the whole room or a specific working area. Example for an office task area:

task
height = 0.75 m

area

use r

The maintenance factors 1.00 m can be determined on a case-by-case basis from the manufacturers data (see also Chapter 8). The maintenance factors and schedules for Zumtobel luminaires are given in the Quickplan tables (Chapter 6). Where no individual maintenance data is available, the following values are recommended as reference maintenance factors for modern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0.67 in a clean atmosphere, and 0.50 in very dirty environments. EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must document the maintenance factor and maintenance schedule. UGRL is the upper limit for direct glare. The UGR value calculated in the design process must lie below this (the Quickplan tables give the UGR figure for the luminaire used in a medium-size reference room). Ra is the lower limit for the colour rendition index. The Ra of the selected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value. 2 / Chapter 2

oo r-a

rea

The Lighting Handbook

Type of interior, task or activity

UGRL

Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings

Traffic zones Circulation areas and corridors Stairs, escalators, travolators Loading ramps/bays Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms Canteens, pantries Rest rooms Rooms for physical exercise Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets Sick bay Rooms for medical attention Control rooms Plant rooms, switch gear rooms Telex, post room, switchboard Store rooms, cold stores Store and stockrooms Dispatch packing handling areas Storage rack areas Gangways: unmanned Gangways: manned Control stations 100 150 150 200 100 300 200 500 500 200 500 100 300 20 150 150 28 25 25 22 22 22 25 19 16 25 19 25 25 22 22 40 40 40 80 80 80 80 80 90 60 80 60 60 40 60 60

Industrial activities and crafts

Agriculture Loading and operating of goods, handling equipment and machinery Buildings for livestock Sick animal pens; calving stalls Feed preparation; dairy; utensil washing Bakeries Preparation and baking Finishing, glazing, decorating Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks Drying Preparation of materials; work on kilns and mixers General machine work Rough forms Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware Drying Preparation, general machine work Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping simple parts, glazing, glass blowing Grinding, engraving, glass polishing, shaping precision parts, manufacture of glass instruments 200 50 200 200 300 500 50 200 300 300 50 300 300 750 25 25 25 22 22 28 28 25 25 28 25 25 19 80 40 80 80 80 80 20 40 80 80 20 80 80 80

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 2 / 3

Type of interior, task or activity Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving Precision work e.g. decorative grinding, hand painting Manufacture of synthetic precious stones Chemical, plastics and rubber industry Remote-operated processing installations Processing installations with limited manual intervention Constantly manned work places in processing installations Precision measuring rooms, laboratories Pharmaceutical production Tyre production Colour inspection Cutting, finishing, inspection Electrical industry Cable and wire manufacture Winding: large coils medium-sized coils small coils Coil impregnating Galvanising Assembly work: rough e.g. large transformers medium e.g. switchboards fine e.g. telephones precision e.g. measuring equipment Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting Food stuffs and luxury food industry Work places and zones in breweries, malting floor for washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving, peeling cooking in preserve and chocolate factories work places and zones in sugar factories for drying and fermenting raw tobacco, fermentation cellar Sorting and washing of products, milling, mixing, packing Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering floor in sugar refineries Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes

UGRL

750 1000 1500 50 150 300 500 500 500 1000 750 300 300 500 750 300 300 300 500 750 1000 1500

16 16 16 28 25 19 22 22 16 19 25 25 22 19 25 25 25 22 19 16 16

Wire and pipe drawing shops; cold forming 300 Plate machining: thickness 5 mm 200 Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm 300 Tool making; cutting equipment manufacture 750 Assembly: rough 200 medium 300 fine 500 precision 750 Galvanising 300 Surface preparation and painting 750 Tool, template and jig making, precision mechanics, micromechanics 1000 Paper and paper goods Edge runners, pulp mills 200 Paper manufacture and processing, paper and corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture 300 Standard bookbinding work, e.g. folding, sorting, gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing 500 Power stations Fuel supply plant 50 Boiler house 100 Machine halls 200 Side rooms, e.g. pump rooms, condenser rooms etc.; switchboards (inside buildings) 200 Control rooms 500 Outdoor switch gear 20 Printers Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving, work on stones and platens, printing machines, matrix making 500 Paper sorting and hand printing 500 Type setting, retouching, lithography 1000 Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 Steel and copper engraving 2000 Rolling mills, iron and steel works Production plants without manual operation 50 Production plants with occasional manual operation 150 Production plants with continuous manual operation 200 Slab Store 50 Furnaces 200 Mill train; coiler; shear line 300 Control platforms; control panels 300 Test, measurement and inspection 500 Underfloor man-sized tunnels; belt sections; cellars etc. 50

19 19 19 16 16 28 25 25 25 22 22

80 80 80 90 80 20 40 80 20 20 40 80 80

Type of interior, task or activity

UGRL

Textile manufacture and processing Work places and zones in baths, bale opening 200 Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work, drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting, pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning 300 Spinning, plying, reeling, winding 500 Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting 500 Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches 750 Manual design, drawing patterns 750 Finishing, dyeing 500 Drying room 100 Automatic fabric printing 500 Burling, picking, trimming 1000 Colour inspection; fabric control 1000 Invisible mending 1500 Hat manufacturing 500 Vehicle construction Body work and assembly 500 Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber 750 Painting: touch-up, inspection 1000 Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 Final inspection 1000 Wood working and processing Automatic processing e.g. drying, plywood manufacturing 50 Steam pits 150 Saw frame 300 Work at joiners bench, gluing, assembly 300 Polishing, painting, fancy joinery 750 Work on wood working machines e.g. turning, fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting, sawing, sinking 500 Selection of veneer woods 750 Marquetry, inlay work 750 Quality control, inspection 1000

25 22 22 22 22 22 22 28 25 19 16 19 22 22 22 19 19 19

60 80 80 80 80 90 80 60 80 80 90 90 80 80 80 90 80 80

28 28 25 25 22 19 22 22 19

40 40 60 80 80 80 90 90 90

Offices
Offices Filing, copying, etc. Writing, typing, reading, data processing Technical drawing CAD work stations Conference and meeting rooms Reception desk Archives 300 500 750 500 500 300 200 19 19 16 19 19 22 25 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 2 / 7

Type of interior, task or activity

UGRL

Retail premises
Retail premises Sales area Till area Wrapper table 300 500 500 22 19 19 80 80 80

Places of public assembly

General areas Entrance halls Cloakrooms Lounges Ticket offices Restaurants and hotels Reception/cashier desk, porters desk Kitchen Restaurant, dining room, function room Self-service restaurant Buffet Conference rooms Corridors Theatres, concert halls, cinemas Practice rooms, dressing rooms Trade fairs, exhibition halls General lighting Museums Exhibits, insensitive to light Light sensitive exhibits Libraries Bookshelves Reading area Counters Public car parks (indoor) In/out ramps (during the day) In/out ramps (at night) Traffic lanes Parking areas Ticket office 100 200 200 300 300 500 200 300 500 100 300 300 22 25 22 22 22 22 22 22 19 25 22 22 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

according to requirements 200 500 500 300 75 75 75 300 19 19 19 25 25 25 19 80 80 80 20 20 20 20 80

Educational premises
Nursery school, play school Play room Nursery Handicraft room Educational buildings Classrooms, tutorial rooms Classroom for evening classes and adults education 300 300 300 300 500 19 19 19 19 19 80 80 80 80 80

8 / Chapter 2

The Lighting Handbook

Type of interior, task or activity Lecture hall Black board Demonstration table Art rooms Art rooms in art schools Technical drawing rooms Practical rooms and laboratories Handicraft rooms Teaching workshop Music practice rooms Computer practice rooms (menu driven) Language laboratory Preparation rooms and workshops Entrance halls Circulation areas, corridors Stairs Student common rooms and assembly halls Teachers rooms Library: bookshelves Library: reading areas Stock rooms for teaching materials Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools (general use) School canteens Kitchen

Em 500 500 500 500 750 750 500 500 500 300 300 300 500 200 100 150 200 300 200 500 100 300 200 500

UGRL 19 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 22 22 25 25 22 19 19 19 25 22 22 22

Ra 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

Health care premises

Rooms for general use Waiting rooms Corridors: during the day Corridors: during the night Day rooms Staff rooms Staff office Staff rooms Wards, maternity wards General lighting Reading lighting Simple examinations Examination and treatment Night lighting, observation lighting Bathrooms and toilets for patients Examination rooms (general) General lighting Examination and treatment Eye examination rooms General lighting Examination of the outer eye 200 200 50 200 500 300 100 300 300 1000 5 200 500 1000 300 1000 22 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 22 19 19 19 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 90 90 80 90

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 2 / 9

Type of interior, task or activity Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts Ear examination rooms General lighting Ear examination Scanner rooms General lighting Scanners with image enhancers and television systems Delivery rooms General lighting Examination and treatment Treatment rooms (general) Dialysis Dermatology Endoscopy rooms Plaster rooms Medical baths Massage and radiotherapy Operating areas Pre-op and recovery rooms Operating theatre Operating cavity Intensive care unit General lighting Simple examinations Examination and treatment Night watch Dentists General lighting At the patient Operating cavity White teeth matching Laboratories and pharmacies General lighting Colour inspection Decontamination rooms Sterilisation rooms Disinfection rooms Autopsy rooms and mortuaries General lighting Autopsy table and dissecting table

UGRL

500 300 1000 300 50 300 1000 500 500 300 500 300 300 500 1000

16 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

90 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 90 90

100 300 1000 20 500 1000 5000 5000 500 1000 300 300 500 5000

19 19 19 19 19 19 19 22 22 19

90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 80 90 80 80 90 90
The Lighting Handbook

10 / Chapter 2

Type of interior, task or activity

UGRL

Transportational areas
Airports Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim areas Connecting areas, escalators, travolators Information desks, check-in desks Customs and passport control desks Waiting areas Luggage store rooms Security check areas Air traffic control tower Testing and repair hangars Engine test areas Measuring areas in hangars Railway installations Covered platforms and passenger subways (underpasses) Ticket hall and concourse Ticket and luggage offices and counters Waiting rooms 200 150 500 500 200 200 300 500 500 500 500 22 22 19 19 22 25 19 16 22 22 22 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

50 200 300 200

28 28 19 22

40 40 80 80

Sports facilities
The following details apply to competition class I (lower requirements apply to classes II and III) Em and Ra data according to European Standard EN 12193 General school sports data from EN 12464 An Ra level of 80 should be preferred For lighting for training purposes, usually an UGRL level of 22 should be observed Aerobics 500 Archery 200 Athletics (all disciplines) 500 Badminton 750 Basketball 750 Billards 750 Boccia 300 Boules 300 Bowling 200 Bowls 500 Boxing (competition/training) 2000/300 Climbing 500 Cricket 750 Cricket nets 1500 Curling (target/playing area) 300/200 Cycling 750 Dancing (fitness) 500 Darts 200

The Lighting Handbook

60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

Chapter 2 / 11

Type of interior, task or activity Fencing Football (indoor) Gymnastics Handball Hockey Ice hockey Ice skating Judo Kendo/Karate Netball Petanque Racketball Riding Roller skating School sports Shooting Snooker Speed skating Squash Swimming Swimmung (school level) Table tennis Tennis Volleyball Weight lifting Wrestling

Em 750 750 500 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 300 750 500 500 750 200 750 500 750 300 500 750 750 750 750 750

Ra 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60

12 / Chapter 2

The Lighting Handbook

Type of area, task or activity

General circulation areas at outdoor workplaces

Walkways exclusively for pedestrians Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. (10 km/h), e.g. bicycles, trucks and excavators Regular vehicle traffic (max. 40 km/h) Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points 5 10 20 50 20 30 50 50 200 20 50 100 200 5 20 50 150 150 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 60 20 20 40 40 20 20 20 20 20

Airports
Hangar apron Terminal apron Loading areas Fuel depot Aircraft maintenance stands

Building sites
Clearance, excavation and loading Construction areas, drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and storage tasks Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work, wooden mould and framework mounting, electric piping and cabling Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and pipe mountings

Fuel filling stations

Vehicle parking and storage areas Entry and exit driveways: dark environment (i.e. rural areas and suburbs) Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i.e. cities) Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas Meter reading area

Industrial sites and storage areas

Short term handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of solid bulk goods Continuous handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of freight, lifting and descending location for cranes, open loading platforms Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms, use of tools, ordinary reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection 20 50 100 200 20 20 20 60

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 2 / 13

Type of area, task or activity

Parking areas
Light traffic, e.g. parking areas of shops, terraced and apartment houses; cycle parks Medium traffic, e.g. parking areas of department stores, office buildings, plants, sports and multipurpose building complexes Heavy traffic, e.g. parking areas of schools, churches, major shopping centres, major sports and multipurpose building complexes 5 10 50 20 20 20

Petrochemical and other hazardous industries

Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated valves, starting and stopping motors, lighting of burners Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances, inspection of leakage, piping and packing Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances, replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments Fuel loading and unloading sites Repair of machines and electric devices 20 50 100 100 200 5 20 50 100 100 200 20 20 40 20 60 20 20 20 40 40 60

Power, electricity, gas and heat plants

Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas Handling of servicing tools, coal Overall inspection General servicing work and reading of instruments Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance Repair of electric devices

Railways and tramways

Railway areas including light railways, tramways, monorails, miniature rails, metro, etc. Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 Railway yards: flat marshalling, retarder and classification yards 10 Hump areas 10 Freight track, short duration operations 10 Open platforms, rural and local trains, small number of passengers 15 Walkways 20 Level crossings 20 Open platforms, suburban and regional trains with large number of passengers or inter-city services with small number of passengers 20 Freight track, continuous operation 20 Open platforms in freight areas 20 Servicing trains and locomotives 20 Railway yards handling areas 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 20

14 / Chapter 2

The Lighting Handbook

Type of area, task or activity Coupling area Stairs, small and medium-size stations Open platforms, inter-city services Covered platforms, suburban or regional trains or inter-city services with small number of passengers Covered platforms in freight areas, short duration operations Covered platforms, inter-city services Stairs, large stations Covered platforms in freight areas, continuous operation Inspection pit

Em 30 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

Ra 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 40 40

Saw mills
Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and chip conveyors Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading points and sawn timber loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor, stacking Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber Grading and packaging Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 20 50 100 200 300 20 20 40 40 40

Extracts from Austrian Standard (NORM) EN 12464-1 Light and lighting lighting of workplaces Part 1: indoor workplaces (2003-04-01) Austrian Standard (NORM) EN 12464-2 Light and lighting lighting of workplaces Part 2: outdoor workplaces (2007-10-01) Austrian Standard (NORM EN 12193) Light and lighting sports facility lighting (2008-04-01)
The Lighting Handbook

published with permission by the Austrian Standards Institute, A-1020 Vienna, Heinestrasse 38 Ordering of standards and products, as well as research on the subject at www.on-norm.at

Chapter 2 / 15

Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/applications

Chapter 3 / 5

LED luminaires From semiconductor to lighting innovation

Static and dynamic light Benefits of LED technology: long service life = low maintenance costs low power consumption = minimum operating costs vibration and impact-proof compact size Benefits of LED technology in comparison with low-voltage halogen

high colour stability efficient control thanks to simple control system low heat generation light without IR/UV

In comparison with lowvoltage halogen, light without IR/UV in particular, and consequently the absence of any heat radiation, is one of the main benefits. The energy efficiency of LEDs greatly exceeds that of low-voltage halogen luminaires. In comparison with compact fluorescent lamps, the benefits are slightly smaller. In addition to conservational lighting and long maintenance intervals, projected light is a main benefit. The light can be optimally directed into the area required by means of lens optics, which means that the illumination output can be used much more efficiently. Moreover, cove lighting in dynamic colours can be generated in a space-saving and energy-efficient manner, e.g. by means of LED RGB lighting solutions.

Benefits of LED technology in comparison with fluorescent lamps

6 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Limits of LED technology

Today, the LED is less energyefficient than the following lamp technologies: fluorescent lamps: 80100 lm/W high-pressure halogen lamps: 90100 lm/W high-pressure sodium vapour lamps: 100120 lm/W LEDs: 4080 lm/W LEDs dont like high ambient temperatures. If LEDs are used at high ambient temperatures (e.g. sauna, etc.), this will strongly effect luminous flux and reduce the LEDs service life. High-performance LEDs generate a lot of heat at the board side. In order to ensure a service life of 50,000 hours for an LED luminaire, the boards must be properly cooled (e.g. cooling fins, ventilator or water cooling).

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 7

LED General lighting

Typical applications Properties luminaire luminous flux: 1000 lm or 1800 lm LED alternative to 1/26 W or 2/26 W compact fluorescent lamp luminaire efficiency > 50 lm/W colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K 1000 lm projected light colour temperature adjustable from 27006500 K RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel Ra 80 Monochrome/ RGB white

control of white light via RGB, RGB

luminaire luminous flux of 3300 lm as alternative to 4/14 W T16 stabilised white light with colour temperature of 3500 K colour rendering index Ra 90 luminaire efficiency 62 lm/W service life 50,000 hours at 70 % luminous flux glare limitation 65 L < 1500 cd/m2 and UGR < 16 recessed or surface-mounted luminaire with ceiling brightening

white

white hybrid luminaire with 48/60 W direct LED light and 2 x 2880 W T16 indirect light separately controllable direct and indirect light 23003600 lm direct LED light colour temperature 4300 or 6500 K luminaire efficiency up to 66 lm/W waveguide optic with MPO+ technology for glare control with steeply inclined displays individual luminaire or continuous-row luminaire luminaire luminous flux of 600 lm replaces 18 W fluorescent lamps or 50 W low-voltage halogen lamps luminaire efficiency 49 lm/W colour temperature 2700 K and 3500 K IP44 stable colour temperature service life 50,000 hours at 70 % luminous flux surface-mounted and emergency lighting version also available luminaire luminous flux: 2900 lm luminaire efficiency 60 lm/W colour temperature 2700 K and 3500 K IP44 stable colour temperature service life 50,000 hours at 70 % luminous flux white

white

* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!

8 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable DALI

Supply 230 V

Indoor/outdoor applications indoor application

Typical application Presentation and Retail Art and Culture Offices and Communication

Product

PANOS PureWhite

dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel)

230 V

indoor application

Presentation and Retail Art and Culture Offices and Communication Hotel and Wellness Presentation and Retail Offices and Communication

PANOS BioMotion

switchable, dimmable DALI, dimmable SwitchDim, dimmable 110 V

230 V

indoor application

CRAYON Q

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 9

LED General lighting

Typical applications Properties > 800 lm projected light as an alternative to 26 W compact fluorescent lamps colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K Monochrome/ RGB white

220 lm projected light as an alternative to 35 W low voltage halogen indirect RGB light for mellow downlight effect in dynamic colours

RGB + white

white luminaire luminous flux: up to 1000 lm (3000 K) luminaire luminous flux: up to 1150 lm (4200 K) projected LED accent light as an alternative to 75 W low voltage halogen 12 W spotlight (400 lm max.) with 15 or 30 W spotlight (1150 lm max.) with 25 beam angle system combines miniaturised, high-power LED spotlights for accent lighting with T16 lighting inserts for (direct and indirect) ambient lighting and wall lighting (wallwashing) LED light lines offer the possibility of room brightening and provide atmospheric special-effect lighting luminaire luminous flux: up to 289 lm per lighting head white RGB (light lines)

white luminaire luminous flux: up to 1000 lm (3000 K) luminaire luminous flux: up to 1150 lm (4200 K) projected LED accent lighting as an alternative to 75 W low-voltage halogen lamps 12 W spotlight (400 lm max.) with 15 or 30 W spotlight (1150 lm max.) with 25 beam angle dimmable on the spotlight via soft-touch control lenses available as lighting accessories optimised glare control lockable spotlight 510 cd 3000 K and 4000 K colour temperatures white

* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!

10 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable DALI

Supply 230 V

Indoor/outdoor applications indoor application

Typical application Presentation and Retail Art and Culture Offices and Communication

Product

ARCOS

switchable, dimmable

24 V

indoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Offices and Communication

MICROS

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 11

LED Decorative lighting

Typical applications Properties Monochrome/ RGB

video-compatible lighting module from the CIELOS range RGB wall/ceiling mounted standard Plug & Play cluster including control and configuration

luminaire is part of the SCONFINE pendant luminaire series 3000 K colour temperature

white

high-intensity light line for illuminating surfaces and faades surface-mounted on ceiling, wall, floor (not recessed/ recessed in floor) adjustable bracket available as accessory

RGB, RGBA warm white intermediate white cool white blue

RGB continuous light line for indoor and outdoor lighting clear, diffuse or opal light line for illumination or as luminous line compact form with radial or axial leads lengths from 30 cm to 2.10 m

modular LED light line system for individual, slot and channel mounting not suitable for installation in floors

white blue RGB

modular LED light line system for individual, slot and channel mounting SYSTEMLED Deco Basic optimised for cove lighting not suitable for installation in floors

white blue RGB

IP68 version for underwater lighting walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg

yellow red green white blue

* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!

12 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Switchable/ dimmable* videocontrolled

Supply 230 V

Indoor/outdoor applications indoor application

Typical application Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Offices and Communication

Product

CIELOS MOVE

switchable, dimmable

230 V

indoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness

SCONFINE SFERA

switchable, fully-DMX controllable, DMX-segment controllable Fully-DMX controllable, DMX-segment controlled, Fully-video controlled, Individual video-pixel controlled switchable, dimmable

230 V

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Outdoor areas

HEDERA

24 V

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

HILIO

24 V

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Offices and Communication Outdoor areas Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Offices and Communication Outdoor areas Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

SYSTEMLED FLOOD

switchable, dimmable

24 V

indoor application outdoor application

SYSTEMLED DECO

switchable, dimmable

230 V 24 V

indoor application outdoor application

LEDOS M

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 13

LED Decorative lighting

Typical applications Properties accent spotlight (spot/flood) walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg Monochrome/ RGB white blue RGB

diffuser with transparent sides gives the luminaire unit a white blue floating appearance RGB model without frame also available

extremely easy wiring via self-tapping cable connector for indoor applications

yellow red green white blue RGB white blue RGB

glass only model available for indoor applications walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg

walk-over capacity to max. 500 kg RGB models feature integrated DALI power supply unit also available as a wall-mounted version

white blue RGB

white illuminance in accordance with EN 1838 for additional emergency lighting close to ground level unique lens/reflector optic ensures optimal light distribution on the floor available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5400 K strings of pixels for structuring surfaces custom pixel spacing is possible high illumination output thanks to 3 RGB LEDs in one pixel RGB

* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!

14 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable

Supply 230 V 24 V 350 mA

Indoor/outdoor applications indoor application outdoor application

Typical application Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

Product

LEDOS B

switchable, dimmable

230 V 24 V

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

LEDOS H

switchable, dimmable

230 V 24 V

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

KAVA LED

switchable, dimmable

230 V 24 V 350 mA

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

PASO II LED

switchable, RGB dimmable, DALI

230 V

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

PHAOS LINE

switchable, dimmable

230 V 350 mA

indoor application outdoor application

Offices and Communication Outdoor areas

ORILED

video controlled

230 V with SCU

indoor application outdoor application

Presentation and Retail Offices and Communication Hotel and Wellness Outdoor areas

CAPIX

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 15

Spots and tracks An unbeatable team

Chapter 3 / 19

ARCOS spotlight system Highest sensibility for art and culture

The ARCOS spotlight system has been specially designed for use in high-grade art and culture applications as well as for use in retail spaces. Its linear design, compact dimensions and perfect proportions blend seamlessly into any interior design scheme.

Application: museums exhibitions art galleries retail and presentation areas

Design by David Chipperfield Architects

Benefits: unobtrusive, linear design control gear and accessory holder fit inside the spotlight housing innovative thermal properties (Cool Touch) ergonomic user interface for add-on functions (spotlight fixing and lamp focus adjustment, dimmable on the spotlight)

lamp glare control thanks to built-in anti-glare ring new 3-phase adapter: discreet shape, optimised handling, DALI-compatible via three-phase track comprehensive spotlight system and wide choice of accessories cater perfectly for a wide variety of lighting tasks

20 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Models: for 3-phase and DALI tracks 4 sizes as standard spotlight, or with wallwasher attachment for premium accent lighting light sources: LED up to 30 W, low-voltage halogen up to 100 W, HIT up to 150 W

linear wallwasher for uniform illumination (T16, QT-DE, HIT-DE) projection spotlight with iris diaphragm or contour slider for sharp-edged points of light extensive choice of accessories

Standard versions

ARCOS 1 ARCOS 1 ARCOS 2 Projection

ARCOS 3

ARCOS 4 HIT

ARCOS 4 QT/QR 111

Wallwasher versions

ARCOS 1

ARCOS 2

ARCOS 3

ARCOS 4 HIT

ARCOS 4 QT/QR 111

Wallwasher versions

The Lighting Handbook

ARCOS WW HIT-DE

ARCOS WW T16

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 21

DISCUS spotlight system Efficient retail area lighting using state-of-the-art light sources
Form follows LED for the first time ever, the design of the DISCUS spotlight has been geared towards LED technology and, thanks to its unobtrusively flat shape, it blends perfectly into any interior design scheme. Versions for HIT light sources round out the product range; track-mounted and ceiling-recessed spotlights allow for integral lighting solutions.

Design by EOOS

Application: shops, shop windows & retail areas

Benefits: unobtrusive design and flat shape innovative construction allows strictly passive cooling of the LED module efficient lighting concepts thanks to state-of-the-art light sources (LED and HIT) new track-box adapter for track-mounted spotlights: compact design and optimised handling

complete lighting solution thanks to the combination of track-mounted and ceilingrecessed spotlights spotlight rotates through 360, pivots through +/90

22 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Models: 3-phase track-mounted spotlights ceiling-recessed spotlights (please order electronic ballast separately), single and double

LED 30 W HIT 20/35 W GU6,5 HIT 35/70 W G8,5 (all versions are available with same-diameter spotlight head) extensive choice of accessories

Surface-mounted spotlights

DISCUS LED

DISCUS HIT

Recessed spotlights

DISCUS-S E1 HIT

DISCUS-S DISCUS S E2 HIT

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 23

SUPERSYSTEM Multifunctional lighting system with innovative LED hybrid technology

SUPERSYSTEM is a compact, linear lighting system which is perfect for use in art and culture, and presentation and retail applications. Extremely disparate requirements can be met and hybrid solutions can be implemented within a project thanks to its flexible, modular design that uses various lighting inserts.

Application: art and culture presentation and retail reception areas

Design by Supersymetrics

Benefits: compact, miniaturised shape unobtrusive design premium look, functional but aesthetically pleasing highly flexible thanks to a wide variety of lighting inserts with LEDs and conventional light sources for accent and general lighting

LED lighting heads can be rotated, swivelled and completely recessed independently of each other

24 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Models: SUPERSYSTEM H or S section for accommodating lighting inserts for direct and/or indirect lighting LED lighting heads, 2.5 W or 4.5 W (as single or triple module), available in 3 colour temperatures for efficient, flexible accent lighting T16 lighting insert for diffuse direct/indirect lighting T16 wallwasher optic LED Decoline Basic for indirect ceiling illumination

3-phase track for mounting spotlights SUPERSYSTEM pendant luminaire: hybrid solution with LED lighting heads and T16 SUPERSYSTEM ceilingrecessed downlight with LED lighting heads, single or quadruple SUPERSYSTEM 3-phase LED lighting unit with LED lighting heads, for use straight on 3-phase tracks

LED pendant luminaire

3-phase LED lighting unit

LED downlight single and quadruple

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 25

2LIGHT High-quality downlight system

Impressive looks unobtrusive, flat aluminium frame in titanium colour high-quality printed safety glass panel unique Mellow Downlight effect Design by Hartmut S. Engel

2LIGHT MINI LED 2LIGHT MINI Pure White has a luminaire luminous flux of 1100 lm (3000 K and 4000 K)

2LIGHT MINI RGB/W 350 lm of projected light, direct LED light with RGB LED for a unique mellow downlight effect

2LIGHT MINI MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting also available with LED Application: display lighting, restaurants, cafeterias, bars, reception areas, hotels, residential properties

2LIGHT-C MINI (CARDAN) MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units Application: sales counters, small presentation areas, points of sale, shelf lighting

26 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

2LIGHT MINI surfacemounted MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting surface-mounted housing can be installed quickly using CLIX mechanism Application: display lighting, reception areas, corridors, foyers and all other applications for which surface-mounted luminaires can be used

2LIGHT downlight system for widearea general lighting Application: reception areas, waiting areas, restaurants, corridors, foyers, conference rooms, relaxation areas, shopping arcades

2LIGHT-C (CARDAN) downlight system for accent lighting maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units Application: shops, retail areas, presentation areas, museums

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 27

Benefits:

Easiest possible maintenance/easy handling 2LIGHT has a completely closed housing. At the same time, 2LIGHT is light-tight in the ceiling. The unique EasyClean catch enables quick and easy relamping.

Unique technical lighting features innovative principle of reflector splitting diffuse light: a special matt-sanded plastic panel behind the safety glass ensures a matched soft light component around the reflector. Soft, pleasantly bright light is provided. direct reflector light: light component directed downwards via facetted reflector

28 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Models:

2LIGHT (fixed)

2LIGHT-C (pivots on gimbals)

2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT MINI double module 2LIGHT MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI surfacemounted 2LIGHT single module

2LIGHT double module

2LIGHT triple module

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 29

Type IP44

Module size

Mounting depth

Lamp(s)

Accessories

Protection class

Overview:

30 / Chapter 3
Colour filter Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Mounting kit for thin ceilings IP44 IP44 IP44 IP40 Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Colour filter for soft light component IP44 Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter for soft light component IP44 Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings

2LIGHT MINI 2LIGHT-C MINI

118 x 118 mm

100 mm

CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W

118 x 118 mm

120 mm

256 x 118 mm

103 mm

373 x 118 mm

103 mm

127 x 127 mm x (height) 175 mm 216 x 216 mm

152 mm

LED WN/WW or LED RGB/W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT-C MINI double module 2LIGHT-C MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI surface-mounted 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW single module 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW double module

408 x 216 mm

152 mm

TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W

The Lighting Handbook

2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW triple module

600 x 216 mm

152 mm

Colour filter for soft light component IP44 Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings

2LIGHT-C single module

216 x 216 mm

152 mm

TC-TELI 1x32/42 W T-16 3x24 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 3x35/70 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W

www.zumtobel.com/productsites
Colour filter for soft light component IP44 and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component IP44 and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component IP44 and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors

2LIGHT-C double module

408 x 216 mm

152 mm

TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W

Chapter 3 / 31

2LIGHT-C triple module

600 x 216 mm

152 mm

TC-TELI 3x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 3x20/35/70 W

CRAYON LED downlight

CRAYON E/A165 delivers approximately 600 lm of projected light, thereby achieving the same lighting level as a 50 W halogen lamp or 18 W fluorescent lamp, but with an installed load of just 12 W. CRAYON Q actually achieves a luminaire luminous flux of 2900 lm with an installed load of 48 W. This is equivalent to an efficiency of 60 lm/W. Application: hotel & wellness shops, department stores and malls Benefits: colour rendering index (Ra) in excess of 90 ensures pleasant light and brilliant colours in a room colour temperatures of 2700 K and 3500 K make it possible to choose a temperature to suit a particular lighting situation Models: recessed luminaire, round and square surface-mounted luminaire, round for each of the two models: intermediate white and warm white

public buildings administrative buildings covered outdoor areas and damp locations supplementary red LEDs are added by a built-in sensorcontrolled system to ensure constant lighting quality throughout the luminaires 50,000-hour service life at 70 % luminous flux

32 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

A built-in sensor-controlled system adjusts red LEDs to ensure stable lighting quality throughout the luminaires service life.

CRAYON E165 | Recessed downlight

CRAYON A195 | Surface-mounted downlight

CRAYON Q375 | Recessed downlight

The Lighting Handbook

Application: corridors & foyers sanitary facilities (IP54 in closed ceilings, with accessories) offices (UGR 19) Benefits: replaces 1/26 W and 2/26 W fluorescent lamps but consumes significantly less power with a service life of 50,000 hours at 70 % luminous flux, the downlights are virtually maintenance free Models: luminous flux: 1100 lm and 2000 lm colour temperature: warm white (3000 K) and intermediate white (4000 K)

shops museums hard-to-access areas such as cinema auditoriums, escalators, etc.

versions with 3000 K and 4000 K make it possible to select a colour temperature to suit a particular lighting situation models with a DALI interface allow easy dimming

reflector finishes: specular silver, matt silver, matt white

36 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

PANOS BioMotion Based on RGB technology supplemented with white LEDs. Colour temperatures from 2700 K to 6500 K and a colour rendering index (Ra) of 80 can be set with a luminaire luminous flux of approx. 1000 lm. Application: high-profile prestigious areas (dynamic colour and colour temperature changes) offices & conference rooms (dynamic colour temperature changes in harmony with human biorhythms) Benefits: automatic readjustment ensures constant lighting quality and constant luminous flux throughout service life of 35,000 hours DALI signals from an EMOTION touch panel can be used to generate lighting scenarios in dynamic colours, or a colour temModels: reflector finishes: specular silver, matt silver, matt white Active membrane cooling in the case of PANOS Pure White 2000 lm and PANOS BioMotion ensures efficient thermal management.

shops & museums (different colour temperatures for different materials) hotels & wellness areas

perature spectrum which simulates natural changes of daylight over the course of a day this gives a precisely adjustable colour range that works in harmony with human biorhythms or a colour temperature that can be adapted to suit various surfaces

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 37

PANOS L and H Multi-talented downlights

PANOS L recessed depth of just 100 mm maximum efficiency levels PANOS H satisfies the most stringent glare limitation requirements without the need for accessories

Reflectors and their applications

HF/LF The precision-shaped facets provide brilliant effects, reduced luminance levels and optimum efficiency.

HG/LG Highly specular darklight reflector optic for glare-free working at the highest level.

HM/LM Good looks are guaranteed by this matt reflector optic with reduced dust sensitivity.

HL/LL The white reflector optic is a perfect match for the decorative accessories. Design by Sottsass Associati

38 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

HWW The special ribbed structure of the reflector produces asymmetrical light distribution, ideal for highlighting vertical surfaces.

Finest aluminium plating by sputtering Sputtering is a unique, highquality 4-chamber metallising process applied at high vacuum. Benefits: optimum lighting effect at high efficiency levels, perfect glare control and ideal light distribution high-quality appearance with darklight effect and iridescence-free reflector extremely easy maintenance and easy cleaning

Installation instructions No-tool installation The mounting ring made of die-cast aluminium is fitted without tools using spring clips. Combined refl./flange unit The reflector/flange unit is installed by means of a twist and lock mechanism without any tools. The ballast box has a rapid locking device and forms a pre-assembled luminaire unit with the reflector.

Precision detailing The excellent technical lighting characteristics of PANOS L and H reflector optics would be impossible to achieve if it were not for the exceptional accuracy of their injection-moulded components made of high-grade polycarbonate that direct the light. Zumtobel uses the sputtering method to coat the reflectors, regardless whether they are facetted, smooth or wallwasher reflectors. Aluminium is sputtered onto the plastic
The Lighting Handbook

in a high vacuum; then a very thin but extremely hard protective layer is applied. Compared to conventional vaporising or metallizing of surfaces with aluminium, sputtering ensures a significantly higher quality of the layer and a remarkable improvement in edge coverage. This unique metallisation process has set a new standard in the market. Other benefits include non-iridescence and easy cleaning using a cleaning cloth.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 39

PANOS M/MWW Impressive and powerful

PANOS M Metal reflector for high temperature resistance. Mounting rings and cooling attachments made of die-cast aluminium. Ideal for lamps that generate a lot of heat. PANOS M-V This inwardly swivelling luminaire is no different from a conventional downlight in terms of ceiling look but nevertheless offers the advantages of a swivelling luminaire. PANOS M LG/HG and PANOS M LM/HM Optimal thermal management ensure maximum luminous flux when fitted with 2 x 42 W TC-TELI. The luminaire is light-tight in the ceiling, and can be operated completely closed with IP54. It is ideal for use with strict fire regulations. PANOS MWW As regards its look on the ceiling, the wallwasher with asymmetrical light distribution is not different from rotationally symmetrical luminaires. It does not interfere with the interior design. Wide range of lamps With the wide range of lamps that can be fitted, PANOS M and MWW give lighting designers maximum freedom for professionally setting the lighting stage. 40 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

PANOS S Incredibly versatile, providing more freedom for vertical adjustment

With PANOS S fully swivelled out to 60, it is possible to illuminate a wall from its top edge.

As the lighting head and the housing are separately adjustable, specific areas can be shaded.

For illumination of different levels of shelving, PANOS S can be swivelled into the ceiling by up to 45.

Suitable reflectors for any situation Comparing light distribution/room: length 5 m, height 3 m Accent lighting by PANOS S150 with HIT G8.5

4 x PANOS S150 FL 70 W
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500

Accent lighting by PANOS S200 with HIT G12

4 x PANOS S200 FL 70 W
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500

Wallwashing by PANOS S250 with HIT-DE

The Lighting Handbook

500

700

900

1100

1300

1500

3 x PANOS S250 70 W Chapter 3 / 41

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

PANOS Q Square downlight for uncompromising looks and lighting technology

Perfect one-piece reflector base Consistently square reflector, light-tight, made of high-quality UV-resistant polycarbonate for perfect light distribution.

Persuasive freedom of design various reflector optics: faceted, smooth, matt and painted various cover frames: white, titanium, chromium, frameless
PANOS Q Low

trendy attachments fitted as block or frame suspended attachment and technical lighting accessories

PANOS Q High

Reflector models faceted smooth matt white

Frame models titanium chrome white

Frameless model

Attachments

42 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Less installation time PANOS no-tool quick installation shift & lock system for fixing cover frame quick and easy subsequent installation of attachements

The Lighting Handbook

Type PANOS L

Ceiling cut-out Light sources 175/200/250

PANOS H

Features high light output ratio, mounting depth only 100 mm, variety of surface finishes perfect glare control, DSE-compatible without attachment, illumination of vertical areas

PANOS M

100/150/200/250

Overview of the PANOS range

PANOS M-V

100/150

Reflector optic Light distribution faceted, smooth, painted, matt faceted, smooth, painted, matt, wallwasher smooth, partly structrured flood

PANOS M LG/HG 200/250 PANOS M LM/HM PANOS MWW 150/200

smooth, matt asymmetrical

www.zumtobel.com/productsites
huge variety of light sources, consistent appearance, flat circular design internally swivelling (035) for uniform ceiling look general lighting with high wattages, housing light-tight uniform illumination of vertical areas, calm, uniform ceiling look uncompromising flexibility, can be swivelled in and out, highly convenient control for ceilings without mounting depth, reduced building and installation costs, large variety of surface finishes perfect one-piece reflector base, optimum, glare control (DSE-compatible), exceptional, design freedom (colours + attachments) approx. 1000 lm/1800 lm (lum. flux) of white light, or approx. 1000 lm (lum. flux) and variable 27006500 K in case of BioMotion

PANOS S

100/150/200/250

spot, flood

PANOS A

Surface-mounted

PANOS Q

190/190 250/250

faceted, smooth, painted, matt, wallwasher faceted, smooth, painted, matt

Chapter 3 / 43

PANOS LED

150

smooth, painted, matt

FD 1000 The functional downlight

The FD 1000 downlight is a cost-effective alternative with an attractive price/performance ratio for many application areas such as office premises, side rooms or corridors. FD 1000 concentrates entirely on functionality and boasts a good light output ratio. Available with a selection of the most important lamp types, FD 1000 offers the right luminaire package for any lighting solution. Combining it with decorative attachments allows a plethora of options when it comes to light design and luminaire appearance.

Application: office areas corridors and hallways side rooms

Models + benefits: FD 1000 LF horizontal lamp position facetted reflector ceiling cutout: 200 mm lamps: 1 x 13/26 W, 2 x 13/26 W low-loss ballast/electronic ballast/EVG W3/LDE W5 NF 3/NA3/GET casting surround IP44 attachment, clear and opal decorative disc, decorative ring

44 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

FD 1000 M vertical lamp position ceiling cutout: 150 mm lamps: HIT G12 35/150 W HIT G 8,5 20/70 W HSTGX12 50/100 W meat/cold-meat filter (NUG) and UVA filter no-tool installation ceiling ring, white

FD 1000 S vertical lamp position ceiling cutout: 150 mm/200 mm lamps: HIT-CEG12 35/70/150 W HIT-TC-CE G8,5 20/35/70 W HST GX12 50/100 W QT 12 GY6,35 100 W meat/cold-meat filter (NUG) and IR/UVA filter spot and flood reflectors

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 45

PASO II Recessed floor luminaire system

PASO II, the modern recessed floor luminaire range, knows just how to hit all the right buttons when it comes to setting dramatic contemporary lighting scenes with an extensive, impressively styled product line. Models: PASO II D/Q 120 LED board, PowerLED QR-CBC compact fluorescent lamp PASO II D/Q 190 PowerLED QR-CBC, QR 111 TC-TEL HIT 20 W (190 mm or side length) PASO II D 260 PowerLED LED floor lighting tile TC-TEL HIT up to 70 W (260 mm or side length) prestigious private settings, indoor and outdoor areas Round or square luminaire housings and a wide choice of different light sources and new LED versions in all 3 design sizes allow precise, custom lighting solutions for accent lighting or decorative orientation lighting.

(120 mm or side length)

Application: shops & display windows galleries & showrooms hotels & wellness Benefits: flush with floor or overlapping frame without visible screw heads glass-only model models with reduced surface temperature to protect people and property 46 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

patented sealing system to protect against penetration of surface water various technical lighting accessories

Application: PASO II with LED technology powerful accent lighting spotlights and luminaires for impressive effects and orientation lighting LED luminaires for decoraPASO II everything in the right light Guiding light

tive lighting points, either static or with variable RGB colours luminaires with 3, 4 or 7 PowerLEDs for lighting columns with various spacings in between

Spot and superspot

Floodlighting PASO II extra low-profile design Use in screeded floors, without impacting on the structural calculations of concrete ceilings

Wallwashers

100 mm

PASO II D/Q range, low-profile design

190 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 10 W TC-DEL LED 260 mm HIT 35 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL LED

The Lighting Handbook

PASO II accessories for an impressive yet safe presence colour filters for coloured honeycomb meshes for glare accent lighting control casting surround for quick IR blocking filters for reducing and safe installation surface temperature mounting kit for cavity floors/ anti-slip glass panel available hollow ceilings for fixing upon request PASO II luminaires with over- IP67 general-purpose box for lapping frame cover external control gear (PASO II S) www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 47

SLOTLIGHT II The straight-ahead luminaire: from indoors to outdoors, even round the corner
This new light line hides the luminaire unit and instead relies on delivering an outstanding lighting effect. SLOTLIGHT IIs intelligent design makes mounting and installation significantly easier. It comes with all the features required for any type of mounting: recessed mounting, surface mounting and cord suspension. Complete product range: recessed, surface-mounted and pendant luminaire corner luminaires IP54 luminaires RGB LED luminaires LRO optic for task lighting versions with and without a frame Application: offices schools

Lighting technology/optics: PMMA optic provides virtually 100 % uniform lighting LRO optic for reduced luminance levels IP54: ideal for covered outdoor locations

aluminium reflector increases luminaire efficiency

48 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

The new light line boasts a 50 % improved light output ratio, and this figure can be boosted another 25 % by using an add-on reflector.

No reflections the Luminance Reducing Optic ensures optimal lighting conditions at the workstation.

Lamp arrangement:
A B C A

One luminaire or a continuousrow system running vertically or horizontally. A: single-length B: double-length C: triple-length and multi-length Notes regarding lamps: In the case of SLOTLIGHT II, uniformity is paramount. In order to achieve the best results in terms of uniformity, it is advisable to note the tips on the left regarding the arrangement of lamps.

The blue rectangle in the diagrams denotes the relevant manufacturers printed information.

The Lighting Handbook

A burn-in time of 100 hours at 100 % output is recommended in order to ensure optimal operation of for T16 light sources. The light source should be operated at 100 % output several times during its service life. Chapter 3 / 49

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

ELEEA Direct/indirect luminaire

Louvre optic

MPO optic

Design by ingenhoven architects

ELEEA meets the increasingly exacting requirements that are being placed on task lighting. Economic efficiency is the watchword, both in terms of investment and in use. With its tactically clever light distribution and high light output ratio levels, ELEEA makes a significant

contribution towards lighting quality, comfort and meeting green building and resource conservation requirements. This direct/indirect luminaire combines flexible functions and design options with a decidedly plain and unpretentious styling.

ELEEA light distribution with 1/35 W:

180 150 150

120

300

200

100

30 cd/klm 0

50 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Benefits: Optimised, extremely wideangle light distribution for a minimum suspension height of 15 cm without any hotspots for low room heights. This ensures that the ceiling

is illuminated uniformly and, because of the shallow suspension height, the luminaire becomes part of the ceiling (patented upper reflector for indirect component).

Application: 75/25 direct/indirect light distribution for high light output ratio levels in excess of 90 % for maximum energy efficiency from < 2 W/m2/100 lx Optimised, very wide-angle light distribution for excellent uniformity and vertical illuminance, prevents cast shadows. This ensures technical lighting quality in the room (bright walls and ceilings) without compromising maximum efficiency. louvre optic for high efficiency (< 2 W/m2/100 lx)

LRO optic allows luminaires to be arranged freely in the room hybrid version with LED for indirect component and T16 for direct component; both components are dimmed separately single-lamp and twin-lamp luminaires in identical housings

Application: offices schools

The Lighting Handbook

Models: single and double lengths straight and L-connectors single-cord suspension pendant and surfacemounted luminaire louvre and LRO single-lamp and twin-lamp T16 28/35/49/54 W www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 51

VAERO Waveguide luminaire providing soothing light for people and rooms

Design by Hartmut S. Engel Ingeniously designed VAERO waveguide luminaire with MPO lighting technology for maxiBalance between energy efficiency and lighting quality The sandwich construction of the micropyramidal optic lets the light really sparkle. Together with two other layers, mum energy efficiency. 2 designs available structured and homogeneous. it forms an optical system that ensures glare control in conformity with relevant standards at flat angles (EN 12464) and reduced luminance at steep angles.

Base Micro-pyramidal layer for directing light Diffusor layer

52 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

The Photometric examination of new lighting systems research carried out at TU Ilmenau demonstrates that systems using MPO technology obtain excellent values with respect to contrasts in the room, in the task area and on the screen.

Via adjustable reflectors, the light distribution curve of the luminaires indirect component can be adjusted to the suspension height of the luminaire.

Lighting quality created by contrast engineering

Contrasts in the room Brightness perceived at the workplace is determined not only by illuminance in fact, ceilings and walls have a

major impact, too. Balanced luminance levels create a pleasant, natural working atmosphere.

Contrasts between ceiling and luminaire Bright ceilings open up a room. The luminaires and their luminance levels blend

harmoniously into the brightness pattern of the ceiling. The variable pendant length of VAERO and adjustable indirect components are unique.

Contrast rendition in the task area Visual contrasts in the task area are determined by luminance ratios, e. g. ink colour on background.

The reduced luminance of the MPO diffuser helps to improve contrast rendition (see TU Ilmenau research).

Contrast rendition on screens In every location, and no matter what the angle of inclination, screens must remain
The Lighting Handbook

free from annoying reflections. Thanks to the MPO diffuser and reduced luminance , the viewability of computer screens is excellent.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 53

AERO II Latest-generation hybrid luminaire

A combination of high-power LEDs and T16 lamps makes AERO II the most efficient luminaire in its class. AERO II Hybrid marks a new chapter in the history of lighting technology. It is the first ever luminaire to interactively combine LEDs and fluorescent lamps. Thanks to a hybrid lightsource combination, AERO II manages to reduce the energy consumption of a waveguide luminaire down to levels that were hitherto only achievable using classic indirect/direct louvre systems.

Design by Chris Redfern Sottsass Associati

Benefits: brilliant LEDs take care of the more active, direct component T16 fluorescent lamps provide refreshingly indirect ambient lighting

highly perfected waveguide technology makes it possible to produce lighting solutions that offer maximum visual comfort, support for flexible workstation layouts and impressive energy efficiency

Waveguide technologie High-power white light LEDs

The Lighting Handbook

T16 uorescent lamp

54 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Application: when used in conjunction with an intelligent lighting management system, separately controllable direct and indirect light allow for a wide variety of lighting scenes waveguide technology with lateral injection of light hides the light source from direct view and allows maximum flexibility when positioning luminaires above workstations seamless MPO+ optic with precision-ground micro-

pyramids really lets the brilliant light shine and ensures appropriate glare control for a particular application. Ensures glare control at flat angles and reduced luminance levels at steep angles direct light with high-power LEDs: either highly efficient and stimulating with a colour temperature of 6500 K or pleasantly intermediate (4300 K) can be used as an individual luminaire or as part of a continuous-row system

AERO II T16 The sophisticated design and state-of-the-art waveguide technology of the T16-only version of AERO II are impressive.

The Lighting Handbook

Models: AERO II Hybrid with separately controllable LED direct light and T16 indirect light individual luminaire continuous-row luminaire LED direct light with a colour temperature of 6500 K or 4300 K

AERO II T16 individual luminaire continuous-row luminaire

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 55

LIGHT FIELDS Modular micro-pyramidal lighting system

Design by Sottsass Associati Pure innovation for the office Micro-pyramidal optic Even in surface-mounted and recessed luminaires, the sandwich construction of the micro-pyramidal optic ensures both glare control in conformity with standards and reduced luminance for direct illumination ideal for office lighting according to standard EN 12464.

Micro-pyramidal layer for directing light Diffusor layer

56 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Base

Available as recessed/surface-mounted/pendant/ free-standing or cluster luminaires, they are ideal for the more stylish office, with EN 12464 compliance over a range of ceiling heights and floor areas.

Recessed 1198 x 298 2/28 W T16 1498 x 298 2/35 W T16 598 x 598 4/14 W T16 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16

Surfacemounted 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16

ID pendant 1248 x 310 2/54 W T16 1548 x 310 2/49 W T16 623 x 623 4/24 W T16

Free-standing luminaire 3/55 W TCL 3/80 W TCL

LIGHT FIELDS model Recessed L-FIELDS E 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 6 x 4/14 W T16 Surface-mounted L-FIELDS A 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 3 x 2/35 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 6 x 4/14 W T16

M 625

M 600

1-person office

2-person office

3-person office

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 57

ECOOS 360 light from an individual luminaire and continuous-row system

ECOOS is economically efficient and environmentally compatible it provides allround 360 light using just one light source and fulfils quite specific, different tasks. For working, for relaxing and for a pleasant room effect. It has a versatile range of uses.

Complete product range: surface-mounted pendant luminaire continuous-row system Lighting technology/optics: indirect, direct and lateral light components direct light component is controlled using MPO+ technology Possible uses: can be arranged anywhere in the room thanks to MPO+ technology bright walls (vertical illuminance levels) thanks to Schools:
ECOOS Wallwashers Seating area

Application: offices schools

aluminium reflectors reduce luminance levels for lateral light wide-angle indirect light distribution via diffuserpearl material lateral light component shallow suspension height (35 cm) thanks to wideangle indirect distribution

Offices:

ECOOS Task area Surrounding area

58 / Chapter 3

Innovative LED technology for the very highest levels of lighting quality and visual comfort

the unique system of white and red LEDs creates a perfect synthesis of high efficiency, extraordinary colour rendering and an intermediate colour temperature glare control is optimised for office lighting and is accompanied by high light output ratio thanks to patented MPO+ technology LEDs with a service life of 50,000 hours (L70) ensure minimal maintenance effort

Models: Recessed luminaire

Ceiling

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 63

CIELOS Modular lighting module for creating designs for surfaces using light, colour and dynamism

Design by BILLINGSJACKSON Design

Application: Luminous ceilings capture our attention. Wide-area, diffuse lighting fascinates the viewer. In combination with colour and dynamic changes, they are capable of radically altering the character of a room.

entrance areas conference rooms waiting rooms restaurant and catering areas shops and window displays

64 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Models: Monochrome (1C): T16 version is just 80 mm high Bicoloured (2C): twocoloured T16 version Multicoloured (3C): multicoloured CIELOS for fluorescent lamps or with RGB LEDs CIELOS MOVE: videocompatible CIELOS a video control unit (VCU) is used to play back shapes, colours and images on it 150 mm high (up to 1C) 600 x 600 mm and 900 x 900 mm (2C and 3C only available in 900 x 900 mm size)

300

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 67

MIRAL 2 T16 Surface-mounted louvre luminaire

Complete louvre luminaire range: surface-mounted luminaire wallwasher indirect/direct pendant luminaire Application: offices, schools, shops Benefits: BIVERGENZ plus lighting technology quick installation thanks to mounting bracket externally located terminal block pre-fitted lamp protective film Direct light The pendant luminaire with direct light distribution focuses on balanced lighting of the task area. Indirect/direct light In addition to functional direct light, the pendant model illuminates the ceiling and creates a perfect room atmosphere. Wallwashers Wallwashers are used for architectural settings, for vertical product presentations, or in schools and conference rooms, for illuminating blackboards and flip charts.

Design by Studio Ambrozus

68 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Pre-assembly

Lay in

Fold up

Snap in

Packaging The packaging is part of the unique installation concept. The mounting brackets are accessible from the outside, even before the luminaire is unpacked. The benefit is that the luminaire will remain protected inside the packaging during pre-assembly.

Electrical connection Fast installation is also guaranteed thanks to a centrally located and easily accessible plug-in terminal block (CE compliant). The connecting cable can be installed conveniently and quickly without any need to open the luminaire housing.

The Lighting Handbook

Integrated light source MIRAL 2 is supplied with an LF840 light source (LF830 available on request). This not only minimises the time needed to install the luminaire, it also means that the time otherwise required to procure, transport and temporarily store the lamps can be saved too.

Protective film A special self-adhesive protective film made of recyclable material provides optimum protection against louvre and luminaire contamination. Thus, the MIRAL 2 surface-mounted luminaire can be fully installed while building work is still in progress and used to light the construction site.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 69

FREELINE The TASK AREA luminaire

TASK AREA luminaire for task area-related indirect/ direct lighting luminaires are arranged between room axes, directly above workstation and at right angle to window one luminaire per workstation ensures lighting conditions in conformity with relevant standards

Design by Ingenhoven and Partner Architekten

FREELINE (matt bivergent louvre)

FREELINE (MPO technology) 70 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Lighting technology: matt bivergent louvre for optimum lighting conditions at the workstation Wattages: 1/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 1/80 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 2/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 Models with electronic ballast, DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD)

Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Dsseldorf Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 2736 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.5 kg Material: extruded aluminium, natural anodised finish

Lighting technology: micro-pyramidal optic with glare-free light radiation characteristics Wattages: 2 x 1/49 W T16 2 x 1/54 W T16 2 x 1/80 W T16 Models with electronic ballast, DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD)

Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Dsseldorf Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 3036 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.5 kg Material: extruded aluminium, natural anodised finish

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 71

Free-standing uplights LIGHT FIELDS-S, MINIUM LITE, KAREA, LANOS ...

Free-standing uplights provide maximum flexibility when changing or reorganising ones place; can be positioned freely at the workplace; focus light onto the visual task area; can be personalised, are customised and energyefficient; can be installed quickly, easily, as required and independent of the building; dont have to be installed on/in the ceiling, allow for low level heights.

LIGHT FIELDS-S Brilliant light thanks to innovative MPO+ technology Design by Sottsass Associati indirect/direct distribution asymmetrical indirect component 3/55 W or 3/80 W TC-L direct component via micropyramidal optic glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 (3/55 W) reflector can be swung open for easy cleaning flat luminaire head made of anodised aluminium backlit decorative frame attached

MINIUM LITE Max. energy efficiency and reduced installed load Design by Engel & Zimmermann indirect/direct distribution 2 x 1/55 W or 2 x 1/80 W TC-L large direct component with cell louvre in darklight or matt comfort optic glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 two separate luminaire heads made of anodised aluminium heads pre-assembled for extremely quick installation stand made of anodised aluminium U-shaped steel base

72 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

CAPA Maximum efficiency with a contemporary look indirect/direct light distribution 4/28 W TC-L or 4/55 W TC-L up to 50 % less installed load large direct component maximum light output ratio levels LOR > 90 % CAPA Plus offers maximum user-friendliness and ease of maintenance CAPA Lite has fewer convenience features SwitchDim and SensControl II allow users to adjust the lighting to suit their preferences. From simple switching and dimming through to fully automatic adjustment using presence detectors and brightness sensors, Zumtobel free-standing luminaires provide the right solution to meet any requirement.

OPURA MPO+ technology for great lighting convenience separately controllable direct and indirect light direct light from 28 W TC-L or LED indirect light from 55 W or 80 W TC-L seamless luminaire head pleasantly gentle stylistic idiom exceptionally uniform light emitting panel dimmable luminaire with soft-touch controls

SwitchDim Simple dimming and switching using a switch SensControl Fully automatic control of lighting based on daylight levels and presence detection

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 73

SYSTEMLED Modular LED light lines

SYSTEMLED is a modular LED system for decorative light lines or wide-area illumination of walls. Pre-assembled plugin connectors at the modules help to reduce sources of error during installation, and minimise installation effort. The use of aluminium sections ensures optimum cooling of LED boards, which is a prereq-

uisite to reach a service life of up to 50,000 hours! Varied accessories including a mounting channel, mounting springs and a diffuser provide for a wide range of applications. SYSTEMLED can be used in both indoor and outdoor areas.

Channel installation: No-tool wiring using cables with pre-configured connectors. Using special steel springs, the modules are fitted in the channel or wall and ceiling cut-out without the use of any tools.

74 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Pre-assembled modules in various lengths allow to flexibly adjust the light lines to projectspecific sections. DECOLINE is perfect for illuminating coves and for creating

light lines uniformly illuminated by means of a diffuser. FLOODLINE provides uniform illumination of vertical areas (wallwashing).

Individual Slot Channel Diffuser* installation installation installation DECOLINE Basic DECOLINE IP40 DECOLINE IP65 FLOODLINE IP40 FLOODLINE IP65
* In DECOLINE IP40, the diffuser is clipped onto the LED module. For DECOLINE IP65, modules are supplied optionally with transparent or diffuse optic.

SYSTEMLED Deco: Clip-on diffuser for perfect uniformity.

The Lighting Handbook

SYSTEMLED Deco Basic: Easy to install in the cove thanks to ready-to-connect modules inc. connecting cables.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 75

ORILED Orientation lighting close to ground level with LED

A patented LED optic enables ORILED to project sufficient light to achieve ground-level illuminance of 50 lx or more.

ORILED Decorative, with its warm or blue light colour, is used in areas where the focus is on a decorative lighting effect. By using different control gear, the luminaires can be easily integrated into building management systems such as LUXMATE or emergency lighting system.

In emergency cases, too, additional escape route lighting is ensured via a central battery or 1 h/3 h separate battery packs. With IP65 protection can be used for a broad range of applications. A variety of accessories is available for easy luminaire installation.

Besides its two 1 W LEDs, the secret of ORILEDs excellent illuminance is, in particular, its reflector combined with its unique lens optic.

76 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

By means of flexible mounting brackets, the luminaires are fixed in the wall cut-out, bollard, or in the surface-mounted housing, mounting frame or casting surround. The stainless steel frame is fixed to the luminaire housing via CAMLOCK fasteners. ORILED therefore has no visible screw heads.

Bollard with recessed 350 mA luminaire

The Lighting Handbook

Recessed housing with flushfitted luminaire

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 77

HELISSA Stylish appearance with individuality for indoor and outdoor areas
The decorative HELISSA wall/ceiling mounted luminaire with protection types IP40 and IP65 sets both indoor and outdoor areas masterfully centre stage while saving energy. In addition to round or square glare-free optics, a discreet indirect light component creates a white or coloured lighting corona on the wall or ceiling. Emergency lighting and dimmable models, too, can be easily installed and maintained.

HELISSA round Application: indoor areas such as corridors, stairs and waiting areas applications in temporarily or permanently humid/damp environments (e.g. station concourses) aggressive environments (chlorine or saline-containModels:
Model HELISSA IP40 Size D/Q 360 D/Q 450 HELISSA IP65 D/Q 360

HELISSA square ing environments, wellness areas) outdoor areas around the house, entrance areas public spaces All applications, from inside to outside, can be implemented in the same, highquality design using one luminaire range!

78 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Lamp(s) 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/22 W T16-R 1/55 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-L 1/22 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-DEL

TECTON-H RBS The module for flexible lighting concepts: with the swivelling luminaire head, it is easy to respond to any changes in room layout. Thanks to wideangle lighting technology, retail islands can be created using directed light, also enabling optimum illumination of gondola heads.

TECTON-H RSR Making homogeneous illuminated areas and wall surfaces come alive: using lighting technology with asymmetrical distribution, it is possible to create lighting focuses and, for instance, precisely accentuate shelves.

TECTON-H R A high-pressure module that provides highlights: wide-angle or narrow-beam lighting technology strikingly emphasises seasonal and pallet goods using directional light, pinpointed and brilliant.

82 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

TECTON-H RSRA The surface-mounted model adds refreshing lighting accents for the illumination of counters and fresh goods. Light with asymmetrical distribution in combination with special accessories such as UVA, IR, meat and cold-meat filters makes the goods displayed appear delicious and tempting.

TECTON Decorative optics

With its innovative darklight miniature cell louvre made of aluminised polycarbonate, the indirect/direct optic provides a new interpretation of ID lighting in a continuous-row lighting system. Featuring a 50 % indirect and 50 % direct light component, it is ideal for use in demanding office applications and at POS terminals in retail areas. The MELLOW LIGHT optic with its lighting chamber in diffuser pearl material and a slotted grid-mesh optic provides appropriately glarereduced light with visible luminance levels. Specific applications include prestigious and retail areas with high aesthetic requirements.

The wide-angle, purely indirect lighting characteristics of the indirect optic ensure uniformly illuminated ceilings, preferably in long corridor areas. Providing ambient lighting, it is also ideal for combination with accent lighting in retail areas.

The Lighting Handbook

The pool-light optic made of opal plastic impresses with harmonious, wide-area luminance levels on softly rounded surfaces. It is a perfect choice for wellness areas, sophisticated zonal lighting in retail areas, or cool ambient lighting at the bar.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 83

LINARIA Batten luminaire and light line

LINARIA Seamless Its extremely slender body makes LINARIA the ideal luminaire for prestigious application areas. With no diffuser, and fitted with a new generation of light sources, LINARIA Seamless is supplied with light right up to the ends of the luminaire. Each luminaire is mounted end to end to create a seamlessly continuous light line. Design by Klaus Adolph/ag Licht Application: architecture-related lighting decorative batten luminaire

with Seamless lamp = decorative light line

84 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Benefits of LINARIA Seamless: lighting length is the same as the length of the luminaire itself the lampholder lift neatly sinks the light source into the luminaire excellent colour rendering (Ra 80) high luminous efficiency available in various wattages: 24, 39 and 54 W makes unbroken end-to-end light lines possible no discontinuity and no distracting shadows

single- or twin-lamp version linear appearance with identical wattages DALI-dimmable electronic ballast (24 W on request) housing made of high-grade aluminium through-wired batten luminaires/Seamless available on request (1/39 W and 1/54 W; 2 x 1/39 W and 2 x 1/54 W) is available as a pendant version or as a wall and ceiling-mounted luminaire

Light sources: 24 W/1750 lm 39 W/3100 lm 54 W/4450 lm

T16 549 mm 849 mm 1149 mm Seamless (T16-D) 580 mm 880 mm 1180 mm

Enclosures for Seamless and T16 Clear enclosure transparent glass optic Diffuse enclosure made of diffuser-pearl material translucent (70:30 ratio) light source is concealed Longitudinally prismatic enclosure perfect longitudinal glare control suitable for use in task areas to limited extent

Benefits of LINARIA T16: single-length is available in all T16 wattages is available as a pendant version or as a wall and ceiling-mounted luminaire
The Lighting Handbook

housing made of high-grade aluminium highly resistant to mechanical stress thanks to powdercoated surface finish

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 85

SOLINA The new high-bay reflector luminaire

The new SOLINA high-bay reflector luminaire boasts a striking cylindrical design, a relatively small height (34 cm), a die-cast aluminium housing (for the first time ever, direct and indirect lighting are combined in a high-bay reflector luminaire), and also includes a version for direct installation on the ceiling.

Design by Charles Keller Application: shop/retail, with focus on lighting fresh products architecture-centred luminaire with ceiling illumination Benefits: both lighting types, direct and indirect, can be separately switched and dimmed same lamp and reflector range as COPA D additionally reflector painted in titanium one unit variety of installation options (cord, pendant, chain, adapter) direct installation on the ceiling accessories: IP54 glass cover, prismatic glass cover 2 food filters (M/CM+IR) 2 coloured indirect filters (red + blue) 86 / Chapter 3

industrial lighting, as traditional high-bay reflector luminaire

colour sequences possible via LED RGB combined with EMOTION touch panel or other DALI-controlled systems colour sequences possible via LED RGB, as indirect lighting components static colour situations possible via indirect colour filters in red and blue

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

One unit a variety of mounting options: cord pendant chain adapter direct installation on the ceiling Installation benefits: easy and simple installation, largely without tools luminaire prewired, no-tool electrical installation on plug-in terminal in place twist and lock mechanism makes closing luminaire easy

The Lighting Handbook

Models: indirect lighting optionally: 22 W T-R 5, LED-RGB direct lighting optionally: 4257 W TC-TELI, 60250 W QT 32, 70150 W HIT, 85 W QL, 100 W HST

reflectors: plastic reflector (translucent or painted in titanium), prismatic reflector and metal reflector (also available in titanium-painted finish)

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 87

VALUEA The dimmable power package for industry and commerce

VALUEA uses advanced fluorescent lamps and highperformance reflectors. The result is excellent lighting quality with a good colour rendering index (> 80) and a choice of several lighting technologies. This represents a major advance compared with widely used high-intensity discharge lamps.

Application: applications focus on industrial bays (processing industries, assembly and warehousing); also multifunction bays and sports halls alternative applications in many countries: large-area shop solutions, e.g. UK product range designed for various room heights (low, wide and very wide)

in principle, there are two approaches: either used as a replacement concept for high-bay reflector luminaires (e.g. COPA I biggest size) or as a new installation

88 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Benefits: higher ambient temperatures, 35 C or more (depending on version) significantly better lighting quality excellent colour rendering index (Ra > 80), especially compared with high-intensity discharge lamps no warm-up and restrike times straightforward integration of emergency lighting (centrally powered and local battery solutions) dimming is easily possible: connection to presence detectors and daylight sensors = greater individuality immediate energy savings

long maintenance intervals, especially when combined with industrial ballasts and long-life lamps luminaire can be separately switched even with different light colours failure of one light source does not affect other light sources virtually constant luminous flux in case of fluorescent lamps compared with rapid drop in luminous flux in case of high-pressure light sources adjustable lighting technology

Illuminance curve VALUEA IP20 4/80 W

E 900 800 700 600 500 400 Years 0

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

COPA I IP65 400 W

E 900 800 700 600 500 400 Years 0

6 Initial E

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Maintenance E

The Lighting Handbook

Subsequent E

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 89

PERLUCE Closed lighting system with excellent maintenance factor

Closed surface-mounted luminaire with increased protection type IP50 (IP54) PERLUCE opal optional colour accents excellent light output ratio uniform, fully flexible light emission smooth surfaces, easy to clean excellent maintenance factor

PERLUCE louvre first closed surface-mounted louvre luminaire available on the market optional colour accents excellent light output ratio suitable for high visual requirements maintenance factor better than in open louvre luminaires smooth surfaces, easy to clean lamp and louvre protected against soiling Design by Studio Ambrozus

90 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Application: louvre: for high visual requirements in rooms where dust and dirt are present, e. g. workshops, laboratories, kitchens, classrooms and nursery schools

opal: circulation areas, staircases, waiting rooms, wellness areas, changing rooms, nursery schools and canteens

Lighting technology: T16 technology with electronic ballast louvre: Bivergence plus darklight louvre, reduced luminance levels of L < 1000 cd/m2 at 65, UGR < 19 or < 16 acc. to EN 12464; ceiling brightened up by laterally perforated upper reflector opal: opal optic, UGR < 22 or < 25 acc. to EN 12464

Quality: 1-lamp and 2-lamp models in same housing excellent light output ratio and homogeneous illumination of luminaire injection-moulded optic (generally thin luminaire walls) high stability of optic end-to-end installation without gaps luminaries can be opened easily, even when mounted end to end

Models:
PERLUCE linear PERLUCE wallwasher PERLUCE square opal/louvre opal 1/14 W T16 (IP50) 1/35 W T16 (IP54) 2/18 W TC-L (IP50/54) 1/24 W T16 (IP50) 1/49 W T16 (IP54) 4/14 W TC-L (IP50/54) 1/28 W T16 (IP50) 1/35 W T16 (IP50/54) 1/80 W T16 (IP54) 1/49 W T16 (IP50/54) 1/54 W T16 (IP50/54) 2/35 W T16 (IP54) 1/80 W T16 (IP50/54) 2/49 W T16 (IP54) 2/14 W T16 (IP50) 2/28 W T16 (IP50) 2/35 W T16 (IP50) 2/49 W T16 (IP50/54) Protection type Protection type Protection type IP50 standard IP54 standard IP50 standard (IP54) (IP54)

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 91

SCUBA Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire with impressive problem-solving skills

Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire boasting impressive problem-solving skills (SCII, PC, PMMA, CHEMO diffuser, plastic catches, 15 slope, high-temperature and lowtemperature versions) and a unique, innovative design language (oval, aerodynamic), in various IP65 applications (dust-proof and jet-proof). Materials use are optionally PC, PMMA, CHEMO for diffusers, and polyester (GRP) for the basic housing. SCUBA is the successor of FZ and IFP, and stands for impact resistDesigned by Massimo Iosa Ghini

S C U B A

Shockproof Chemically resistant UV-stable Benet-orientated Application-orientated

ance, chemical resistance, UV-stability, user-friendliness and application-orientation.

Benefits: unique, innovative design smooth/ergonomic surfaces language and catches high light output ratio thanks 15 slope of all visible surto calculated, optimised prisfaces (recommended for food matic structure industry) innovative sealing rim between optionally with heavy-duty electronic ballast for longer basic housing and diffuser service life at high ambient special CHEMO diffuser temperatures (combines benefits of PC and PMMA) Product range with PC, PMMA or CHEMO diffuser: T26 1-/2-lamp 18 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 684 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 36 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 1,294 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 58 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 1,594 mm T16 1-/2-lamp 28/35/49 W; 1,294 mm/1,594 mm T16 1-lamp 54/80 W; 1,294 mm/1,594 mm Special designs (available upon request): SCII, hightemperature, low-temperature, 92 / Chapter 3 emergency lighting, heavyduty electronic ballast, plastic catches, halogen-free wiring
The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Properties of diffuser materials: Polycarbonate (PC) UV-stabilised extremely impact-resistant chemically resistant, to a limited extent Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) 100 % UV-resistant good chemical resistance impact absorbing UV-resistance
30 25 20 15 10

CHEMO extremely UV-resistant, comparable to PMMA substantial resistance to a large number of chemicals impact resistance similar to PC

Yellowness Index

PC with UV-stabiliser PMMA and CHEMO

5 0

Weathering time (months)

100

120

Heavy-duty electronic ballasts The PC industry product range was specially designed for use in harsh industrial environments. All T16 and T26 models ensure a long service life, even under tough environmental conditions.

Comparison of service life of a PC industry ballast compared with a standard electronic ballast, taking the SCUBA luminaire as an example
Reliability

SCUBA + standard electronic ballast

SCUBA with PC industry: same service life at higher temperature

SCUBA with PC industry: double service life at the same temperature

90 %

95 %

100 %
0 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000

service life (h)

The Lighting Handbook

Standard electronic ballast 1/58 W, at 38 C max. 2/58 W, at 32 C max. 1/36 W, at 47 C max. 2/36 W, at 35 C max.

PC industry 1/58 W, at 50 C max. 2/58 W, at 45 C max. 1/36 W, at 59 C max. 2/36 W, at 47 C max.

PC industry 1/58 W, at 38 C max. 2/58 W, at 32 C max. 1/36 W, at 47 C max. 2/36 W, at 35 C max.

Measured values refer to ambient temperature, without through-wiring. Subtract 7 C in case of through-wiring.

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 93

CLEAN Three-level luminaire concept for clean-rooms

CLEAN an overview
Model CLEAN Supreme CLEAN Advanced CLEAN Classic Designs Installation Protection type type Square Linear Usable space Ceiling Surface IP65 IP65 mounted Recessed Recessed IP65 IP54 IP54 IP20

All luminaires boast a highquality surface finish resistant to cleaning agents and Application: In healthcare settings operating theatres laboratories air locks intensive care units emergency wards examination and treatment rooms recovery rooms hallway and corridor areas administrative areas laundries and kitchens doctors surgeries healthcare and rehabilitation centres

disinfectants, and have been given the ENEC mark for their rugged, durable design.

In industry and engineering electronics electrical engineering micromechanics biogenetics pharmaceutical and chemical companies laboratory technology genetic engineering food technology extremely critical areas of food production food industry hallway and corridor areas laundries and large-scale catering establishments

94 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

CLEAN Supreme IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO), issued by the Fraunhofer Institute antistatic surface finish frameless, continuous glass diffuser trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system easy installation of luminaires, convenient relamping CLEAN Advanced IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO), issued by the Fraunhofer Institute cover made of anodised aluminium models with toughened safety glass or shatter-proof PMMA acrylic glass trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system extremely resistant materials easy installation of luminaires, and high-quality workmanconvenient relamping ship CLEAN Classic cover made of anodised aluminium model with PMMA acrylic glass extremely resistant materials and high-quality workmanship

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 95

ZBOX Plug & Play Lighting control system for hotels, private dwellings and shops
Plug & Play pre-addressed and pre-programmed for hotel rooms plug-in connections locally as stand-alone system, or networked with LUXMATE bus web tool for fine adjustment no licence, no special skills required, no experts needed direct connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP) transparency of costs from design through to operation can be upgraded using standard LUXMATE bus components 4 control points included no addressing of luminaires, except for RGBW (DALI Broadcast) Intuitive: clear design layout and functions of control units self-explanatory symbols Emotion: lighting scenes dynamism and controlled colour changes

ZBOX-Controller: W: 372 mm H: 372 mm D: 60 mm

ZBOX-Cxx: W: 86 mm H: 86 mm D: 11 mm

control concept completely focused on guest ZBOX does what guests expect day and night scenes (networked with LUXMATE add-on module: radio-controlled clock)

96 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

Safety: emergency lighting can be dimmer with autoprotect integrated facility (overload protection crash channel provides light for lighting loads) if controller fails quick and easy replacement, no special skills required

Main functions: scenes and individual adjustment special control concept functions adjustable via ZBOX.WEBTOOL mains cut-off device backup function with SD card (under development) ZBOX.NIGHTLOGIC day/night scenes (various scenes are called up depending on the time of day)

Pros: energy savings through lighting scenes at reduced lighting levels cost savings operating costs dimming increases service life of incandescent lamps longer maintenance cycles cost savings fast thanks to pre-addressing and plug-in connectors do it yourself using the ZBOX.WEBTOOL package optimised for workflow on site

Technical data: 8 x output (300 W) switchable via relay dimmable via DALI Broadcast (all electronic ballasts connected are dimmed simultaneously; no DALI addressing; max. of 10 DALI loads) slot for 300 VA universal dimmer (20300 VA; 0 ... 100 %) 1 x output (300 W) for RGBW control of wellness luminaire (DALI group numbers 1 4; max. 16 DALI loads) 1 x output for 1 blinds/ curtain motor 230 V-AC Energy dissipation: 10 W in operation (without dimmer) 4.5 W standby 0.7 W per dimmer

5 x input for DALI ZBOX Circle control unit multiple allocation (e.g. 1 x left bed + 1 x right bed + 2 x room + 2 x bathroom + 2 x hall) 2 x input Key Card and Aux 230 V-AC, potentialfree 1 x LUXMATE bus connection (1 bus load) 1 x RJ45 Ethernet LAN connection for web tool and service

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 97

ONLITE escape sign and emergency luminaires Combining design and functionality
All ONLITE escape sign luminaires are based on first-class lighting technology. This ensures that pictograms are uniformly illuminated at a minimum luminance level of 200 cd/m2. Each ONLITE escape sign can be supplied via three different systems. The respective type of supply is indicated by the luminaires name: NT 1/3 Separate battery supply with auto test and control test function (1 and 3 h stand-alone time) An attractive design and the use of high-quality materials guarantee not only maximum functionality and reliability, but also pleasant, unobtrusive integration with the interior design. NSI Supplied via LPS system (communication via Power Line) DALI Supplied via CPS system (communication via DALI)

230 V AC

NT 1/3 auto test no DALI bus connected fixed test cycle programmes are run automatically, displayed via bicoloured LED low installation effort

230 V AC

SB 128 Controller

98 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

DALI control line

NT 1/3 control test DALI bus connected: luminaires centrally monitored individual configuration/ monitoring of luminaires minimum testing effort fully automatic test log book max. functional reliability

NSI supply via LPS Communication with luminaires with PLC (power line control) via supply line. All luminaires can be individually controlled and monitored. maximum intrinsic safety thanks to self-contained systems easy maintenance low installation effort reduced fire load can be fully integrated into lighting management system

DALI supplied via CPS Supply via CPS, diesel generator or 2nd mains. Monitored via DALI interface. every DALI luminaire can be used as an emergency luminaire minimum maintenance effort interference-free data communication no installation of additional monitoring modules in luminaires required security function of final circuit (makes sure that luminaires can be switched on reliably if communication line is defective)

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 99

ONLITE RESCLITE A world champion in terms of lighting technology and energy efficiency
With a Power LED and three sophisticated optics, RESCLITE paves the way to a new era of emergency lighting. Ideal light distribution thanks to optimum illumination. Only a very small number of luminaires are required for emergency lighting in conformity with relevant standards. Minimum energy consumption and maximum installed load of 5 W. Power input in non-maintained mode approx. 1.5 W. This means that only very small-scale supply and cable systems are needed. Mounting options Recessed into ceiling Minimum design effort. Completely independent from general lighting. The only design work needed is the placing of spacing tables. Extremely easy to install and maintain. Standard installation terminals for throughwiring up to 2.5 mm. Strain relief devices and covers fixed without tools ensure quick, straightforward installation.

Surface-mounted on ceiling

TECTON continuous-row lighting system

The Lighting Handbook

100 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

RESCLITE escape LED emergency luminaire for escape route lighting according to EN 1838

Mounting height in m h 2.2 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0

Max. spacing (m) wall/luminaire b1 a1 5.9 5.7 6.4 6.1 7.1 6.7 8.1 7.4 7.5 2.3

Max. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 13.4 12.9 14.6 14.0 16.4 15.7 19.5 18.5 22.0 19.9

a2 b2

a1 b1

a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and central battery (NSI, DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)

width of escape route: 2 m minimum illuminance across width 1 m: 1 lx uniformity higher than 40 : 1 maintenance factor considered: 0.8

reflection factors: 0 complies with glare reduction acc. to EN 1838

The Lighting Handbook

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 101

RESCLITE anti-panic LED emergency luminaire for anti-panic lighting according to EN 1838

Mounting height in m h 2.2 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0

Max. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 3.4 3.1 3.5 3.1 3.2 2.6 1.5 0.9 0.9 0.7

Max. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 9.3 8.9 10.1 9.5 11.1 10.5 12.9 11.6 12.4 10.4

rotationally symmetrical distribution minimum illuminance: 0.5 lx uniformity higher than 40 : 1 maintenance factor considered: 0.8
h a2 b2 a1 b1

reflection factors: 0 complies with glare reduction acc. to EN 1838

a1 b1

a2 b2

a1 b1

a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI, DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)

102 / Chapter 3

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

The Lighting Handbook

RESCLITE spot LED emergency luminaire for increased illuminance levels acc. to EN 1838

Min. illuminance level of 5 lx s for first-aid, fire-fighting and reporting facilities:

Mounting height in m h 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0

of light cone in m a b 2.4 2.1 2.7 2.3 3.0 2.7 2.8

rotationally symmetrical distri- reflection factors: 0 bution complies with glare reduc minimum illuminance: 5 lx tion acc. to EN 1838 maintenance factor considered: 0.8

a, b

The Lighting Handbook

a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI, DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

Chapter 3 / 103

Type

Light Protection Protection Recognition Surface- Pendant- Cord Wallmounted source type class range on ceiling mounted suspension mounted 90 wallmounted Recessed TECTON

ONLITE LOOK product overview

104 / Chapter 3

RESCLITE

LED

IP40

cV s

ARTSIGN

LED

IP20

15 m 3)

ERGOSIGN T16 8 W IP40 410 Lm

15 m 3) 7.6 m 5)

www.zumtobel.com/productsites

PROOFSIGN LED LED

IP65 1)

20 m 3)

COMSIGN

T16 8 W IP20 410 Lm

28 m 3) 15 m 4)

The Lighting Handbook

COMSIGN II LED

IP20

28 m 3) 15 m 4)

PURESIGN LED

IP40

30 m 3) 15 m 4)

ECOSIGN

T16 8 W IP65 1) 410 Lm

32 m s 16 wc m 4)
2)

www.zumtobel.com/productsites
2) 1) with cable feed only 2) reduced to IP40 3) acc. to EN 1838 and DIN 4844 2) 4) lt. VkF and SN EN 1838 (model for CH) 5) narrow side if mounted on the ceiling

ECOSIGN safety

T16 8 W IP65 1) 410 Lm

s wc

Chapter 3 / 105

CUBESIGN TC-DEL IP40 1/26 W

90 m 3) 45 m 4)

Chapter 4

Lamps and ballasts

Lamp selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The main lamp types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application notes, T16 fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . . A comparison of fluorescent lamps T16/T26 . . . . . . . Application notes, compact fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . Application notes, metal halide lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 + 400 W . . . Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristic values of the major lamps . . . . . . . . . . . Energy efficiency of luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of electronic ballasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption, energy savings, required power . . Overview of LED control gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 34 5 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 24 25 29 30 31 32 33 37

Choosing the right lamp An important first decision

Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of the lighting (see Chapter 2). For instance, incandescent lamps are still the most popular lighting option used in domestic areas to help create that cosy atmosphere. However, these lamps generate only little light, apart from having a short service life. Therefore, despite their low purchase price, energy-efficient and environmentally compatible alternatives must be used increasingly in the future. In other situations, users happily tolerate the higher purchase price of discharge lamps because their high luminous efficiency and long lifetime make them economic. Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find the most suitable lamp for a lighting task. Lamp characteristics can essentially be specified by the following key terms:
Luminous ux/ efciency Drop in luminous ux

Service life

Light colour

Colour rendition

Lamp characteristics

Operating position

Lamp power

Warm-up time

Re-start time

Dimming capability

2 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

Lamp characteristics
1. Power The electrical power consumption of the lamp as opposed to the power consumption of a system comprising lamp and ballast. 2. Luminous flux/luminous efficiency The luminous flux specifies the total amount of light generated by a lamp. The rated luminous flux is measured at a standardised measurement temperature of 25 C in units of lumen [lm]. The ratio of luminous flux to electrical power consumption gives the luminous efficiency [lm/W]. The system light output also takes the ballasts losses into account. 3. Service life The average service life is normally specified, being the time by which statistically half the lamps are still working (mortality), or half the lamps have failed. This test is subject to standardised operating conditions. Lamp manufacturers display this failure rate by curves. In Chapter 8, they are shown as maintenance factors (LSF). 4. Drop in luminous flux The initial luminous flux of a new lamp decreases over its time of operation (lumen maintenance), due to the ageing of its chemical and physical components. Lamp manufacturers display this drop in luminous flux by curves. In Chapter 8, they are shown as maintenance factors (LLWF). 5. Light colour The light colour describes the colour impression made by a white light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) or relatively cool (nw = intermediate, tw = cool). It is affected by the red and blue colour components in the spectrum. 6. Colour rendition The spectral components of the light determine how well various object colours can be reproduced. The higher the colour rendition index (Ra or CRI), or the lower the colour rendition group number, the better the colour rendition in comparison with the optimum reference light.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4 / 3

7. Warm-up time Discharge lamps in particular need between 30 seconds and several minutes to warm up and output the full luminous flux. 8. Re-start High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool down for several minutes before they can be started again. 9. Dimming capability Besides incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps, nowadays all fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can also be dimmed over almost any range. Metal halide lamps, however, are still not approved by the manufacturers for dimming, because this may have uncontrollable effects on light quality and lamp service life. The new series of special models for indoor and outdoor applications constitute an exception. The power of highpressure sodium- and mercury-vapour lamps can be varied, but only in discrete levels. 10. Operating position Manufacturers specify the permitted operating positions for their lamps. For some metal halide lamps, only certain operating positions are allowed so as to avoid unstable operating states. Compact fluorescent lamps may usually be used in any operating position; however, important properties such as the luminous flux vs. temperature curve may vary with the position.

4 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

The main lamp types

QR-CBC

QT12

QR111

H a l o ge n

l a m ps

QT32

QT-DE

QPAR51

QPAR64

Halogen lamps for mains and low-voltage operation longer service life and higher luminous efficiency than incandescent lamps easy to dim

brilliant light excellent colour rendition applications: retail and domestic areas, restaurants and catering

How they work Current flows through a filament and heats it up, just as in incandescent lamps. These lamps therefore generate a relatively large amount of heat. The halogen cycle increases the efficiency and extends the service life compared with traditional incandescent lamps. Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise direction of light, but do require a transformer.
The Lighting Handbook

Due to European legislation, only the most energy-efficient versions of this lamp group will be permitted in future.

Chapter 4 / 5

l a m ps

T16/T26

T16-R

F l uo re s c e n t

Fluorescent lamps high to very high luminous efficiency (in particular T16 HE) good to excellent colour rendition

long service life extensive range of types dimmable application: economically efficient widearea lighting

How they work An alternating electric field generates invisible UV radiation between the two electrodes in the discharge tube. This radiation is converted into high-quality visible light in the fluorescent material. The lamps need a starting aid and a current limiting device, usually combined in an electronic ballast. The luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature.

f l u o re s c e n t

l a m p s

TC-DEL

TC-TEL(I)

TC-L

C o m p a c t

Compact fluorescent lamps compact designs high luminous efficiency excellent colour rendition

extensive range of types dimmable applications: commercial and high-profile interiors, restaurants and catering
The Lighting Handbook

How they work These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular fluorescent lamps, and operate in a very similar way. The luminous flux is dependent on the operating position and temperature. 6 / Chapter 4

lamps

HIT-TC-CE

HIT-CE

HIT-DE-CE

HIT-DE

HIE

HIT

Metal

Metal halide lamps high luminous efficiency good to excellent colour rendition high colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps

cannot be dimmed applications: industrial bays, spotlighting, floodlighting, retail areas

halide

How they work In metal halide lamps, a highly compact electric arc is produced in a discharge tube. The composition of the materials in the tube determines the light quality. A starter is needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be limited by a ballast. Practical electronic ballasts are also available for low-power lamps.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4 / 7

va po ur

Sodium vapour lamps high luminous efficiency and long service life satisfactory to poor colour rendition can be dimmed in discrete steps applications: industrial bays, street lighting
HST-CRI HSE HST

l a m ps S o di um

Colour-improved (Philips SDW): excellent colour rendition warm light

long service life application: retail areas

How they work The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube is defined by sodium, so the light is yellowish and only suitable for special applications. The colour-improved SDW lamp by Philips is a popular choice for lighting retail areas. A starter is usually needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be limited by a ballast. Mercury vapour lamps no starter, just ballast required satisfactory to poor colour rendition can be dimmed in discrete steps applications: industrial bays, street lighting
HME

Mercury vapour lamps

How they work The high-pressure mercury vapour lamp is actually the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp, although it provides a far poorer light quality. The lamps can be started at mains voltage, and so only need a ballast for current limiting. In line with European legislation, these lamps will be banned from the market from 2015 (efficiency too low).
The Lighting Handbook

8 / Chapter 4

LMG-IHf

I nduc t i o n

QL by Philips only 55 W, 85 W and 165 W excellent colour rendition very long service life rotationally symmetrical light distribution

applications: areas where it is difficult to replace lamps; commercial and industrial interiors, retail, indoor and outdoor public areas

l a m ps

How they work A high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into the glass bulb via an antenna protruding into the bulb. This produces UV radiation which is then converted into visible light by fluorescent material, just as in fluorescent lamps. The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes their luminous flux only very slightly temperature-dependent. The lamps can only be operated using special electronic ballasts by Philips. Systems have a very long service life because the only parts subject to wear are in these ballasts. As yet there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4 / 9

Wire bond Bubble LED chip Board

LED (EOS P214 by TRIDONIC)

e m i t t i ng

di o de s

Light emitting diodes (LEDs) very efficient light production extensive model series can be switched and dimmed as required extremely long service life good to very good colour rendering

applications: LEDs can be used for functional and decorative lighting, both indoors and outdoors

( L EDs ) L i ght

How they work Light emitting diodes are modern semiconductor devices. Their properties are determined by the materials used as well as the mechanical design. The active semiconductor layer, in which radiation is produced, is sandwiched between a positive and a negative substrate. Depending on the materials used, a large variety of different colours are produced directly. White light can only be produced using fluorescent materials from blue LEDs or by mixing RGB. Today, the smallest chips have a side length of approx. 250 m (1 micrometre = 1 one-thousandth of a millimetre). The LED modules are supplied with power via appropriate constant current or constant voltage converters. They can be dimmed easily. The LEDs very long service life of several 10,000 hours can only be achieved when overheating is avoided (thermal management). Today, LEDs already count among the most efficient light sources for general lighting.

10 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

Application notes T16 fluorescent lamps

In comparison with thicker T26 lamps (diameter: 26 mm), modern T16 lamps (diameter: 16 mm) show several different properties that must be taken into account for application. 1. Luminous flux temperature curve As for all fluorescent lamps, the lamps luminous flux is temperature-dependent. The maximum value is obtained at an optimum ambient temperature, with losses increasing at higher and lower temperatures. The T16 basically follows the same curve as the T26, but the maximum occurs not at an ambient temperature of 20 to 25 C but at about 35 C. Reason: The cool spot of T16 is not located in the centre of the lamp, but typically at one end of the tube where the manufacturer has fixed its seal. The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambient temperature of 25 C. For the T16, the maximum value therefore lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies may have levels greater than 1.
% 100 80 T26 58 W 60 40 20 T26 36 W T16

80 C

Ambient temperature

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4 / 11

2. CSO Cool Spot Optimizer The photometric data of luminaires typically apply to a standard temperature of 25 C. Where a different ambient temperature prevails, the lamps luminous flux is also affected. In fluorescent lamps, the luminous flux declines in particular at lower temperatures. In order to increase the efficiency of luminaires fitted with T16 lamps, the so-called Cool Spot Optimizer (CSO) may be used. The CSO effects a temperature increase at the lamp by approx. 10 to 20 degrees, resulting in a corresponding shift to the left of the T16 curve displayed (page 11).

Example: FZ 1/54 without CSO at 0 C FZ 1/54 with CSO at 0 C

LB approx. 60 % LB approx. 90 %

In the above example, the luminous flux produced is therefore increased by 50 % and the number of luminaires required is reduced by one third, owing to the CSO. For lighting design purposes, an appropriately adjusted planned luminous flux has to be calculated. The CSO may only be used in conventional T16 28/54 W and/or 35/49/80 W lamps using cold-spot technology, and must be fitted at the lamp end (see picture).

12 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

3. Ageing/burning in Brand new lamps stabilise during the ageing phase. This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched on for the first time, when the initially encapsulated mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed in the lamp. To ensure perfect operation, one should allow a period of 2 to 4 days of operation without dimming or switching, particularly in dimming installations. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and light colour, even exhibiting flickering at low dimming levels. This may have a negative impact on the lamp service life. Also, before assessing a lighting installations illuminance level and lighting quality using already aged lamps, these should be burnt in over a minimum period of 3060 minutes without dimming or switching them. 4. Lamp orientation Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being identical in design, it matters how one or more T16 fluorescent lamps are fitted in the luminaires. In general, lamp ends should always have the same orientation i.e. in multi-lamp luminaires they should lie next to each other, and where lamps are positioned vertically, they should preferably also be at the bottom. For cool environments, it may make sense depending on the type of luminaire to arrange the lamp/s differently.

single-lamp normal and higher ambient temperatures

multi-lamp

cool ambient temperature

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4 / 13

Further details for TETRIS and continuous row arrangements: Particular attention is needed for special lamp arrangements like in TETRIS (TECTON or SLOT luminaires) or in continous-row lighting systems. The so-called TETRIS arrangement provides for lamps overlapping several centimetres. This enables to compensate for the dark zone at the lamps ends. In order to provide for maximum uniformity, it is recommended to also align all lamps identically. The last lamp/s, however, should be turned so as to make the lamp end head towards the centre of the luminaire.

single-lamp

twin-lamp

In a continous-row lighting system, the maximum total luminous flux will be achieved if the lamp ends are placed next to each other, if possible. For cool environments, here too it may make sense to arrange the lamp/s differently.

single- and twin-lamp 14 / Chapter 4

single- and twin-lamp

The Lighting Handbook

A comparison of fluorescent lamps T16/T26

Advantages of T16 fluorescent lamps Reduction in the lamp diameter by about 40 % Higher optical efficiencies possible Improved luminous efficiency Improved luminaire efficiencies from the shift in the luminous-flux peak Standardised luminance levels for all lamp lengths for high-efficiency lamps Larger range of types makes it easier to meet lighting requirements more closely Summary type comparison (selection):
Length T16 Power Rated luminous flux (25 C) 549 mm 14 W 1200 lm 24 W 1750 lm 849 mm 21 W 1900 lm 39 W 3100 lm 1149 mm 28 W 2600 lm 54 W 4450 lm 1449 mm 35 W 3300 lm 49 W 4300 lm 80 W 6150 lm T26 Power Rated luminous flux (25 C) 590 mm 18 W 1350 lm Length 895 mm 30 W 1200 mm 36 W 1500 mm 58 W 2350 lm 3350 lm 5200 lm

Example of interior lighting using T16 and T26 Room dimensions: length = 8 m, width = 6 m, height = 3 m Reflection factors: ceiling = 70 %, walls = 50 %, floor = 20 % Required maintenance value of illuminance: 500 lx Option 1: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/36 W electr. ballast Option 2: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/28 W electr. ballast
Option 1 2/36 W Number of luminaires 8 Max. lamp luminous efficiency 93 lm/W Power consumption per m2 per 100 lx 2.2 W/m2/100 lx Luminaire efficiency 85 % Utilization factor 66 % Energy saving Option 2 2/28 W 8 104 lm/W 2.0 W/m2/100 lx 91 % 73 % 10 %

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 4 / 15

Application notes Compact fluorescent lamps

Ellipsoid E 40 any no

Ellipsoid E 40 any yes

Tube E 40 any no

Ellipsoid E 40 any no

Ellipsoid E40 any no

12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 Calculation of economic efficiency

Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 W from Osram

Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 19,000 lm 17,000 lm 20,000 lm 24,500 lm Colour temperature 5,200 K 5,200 K 5,200 K 3,000 K Colour rendition 90 90 90 91 index Ra

22,500 lm 4,200 K 95

Chapter 4 / 19

These Osram lamps must generally not be operated with a ballast for metal halide (HI) lamps. All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturers data.

OSRAM HQI-T 400 W/N

Tube E40 horizontal 45 no 12,000 h 12,000 h Tube G22 any no Tube G22 any no

HQI-E

HQI-E/P

HQI-BT

Characteristics of metal halide lamps 400 W from Osram

20 / Chapter 4
HCI-TM POWERBALL 400 W/WDL HCI-TM POWERBALL 400 W/NDL
34,000 lm 4,000 K >60 42,000 lm 3,500 K >65 not permitted not permitted 41,000 lm 3,000 K 94 40,000 lm 4,200 K 95

400 W/D

HQI-E (coated) 400 W/N

400 W/D

Design Base Operating position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in lumin., flux

Ellipsoid E40 any no

Ellipsoid E40 any yes

Ellipsoid E40 any no

Tube E40 any no

12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 Calculation of economic efficiency

27,000 lm 5,900 K 90

Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux 26,000 lm 25,000 lm 34,000 lm Colour temperature 5,500 K 5,200 K 4,400 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 60 Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 34,000 lm 31,000 lm 40,000 lm Colour temperature 5,300 K 4,700 K 3,800 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 65

35,000 lm 5,200 K 90

All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturers data.

The Lighting Handbook

PHILIPS HPI PLUS 400 W 743 HOR

Ellipsoid E40 horizontal 20 no 20,000 h 20,000 h Ellipsoid E40 pendant 15 yes Tube E40 horizontal 20 no

HPI-PLUS 250 W 745/767 BU

HPI-PLUS 250 W 745/767 BU-P

HPI-T PLUS 250 W 645

HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU

HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU-P

HPI-T PLUS 400 W 645

Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 W and 400 W from Philips

Design Base Operating position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in lumin., flux 30,000 lm 4,300 K 70 35,000 lm 3,800 K 70 32,500 lm 4,500 K/6,700 K 70 42,500 lm 4,000 K/5,400 K 70

Ellipsoid E 40 pendant 15 no

Ellipsoid E40 pendant 15 yes

Tube E 40 pendant 20 no

Ellipsoid E40 pendant 15 no

20,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 Calculation of economic efficiency

32,500 lm 4,500 K/6,700 K 70

35,000 lm 4,500 K 65 42,500 lm 4,000 K 65

Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux 18,000 lm 18,000 lm 20,500 lm 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K Colour temperature Colour rendition index Ra 70 70 65 Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 25,500 lm 25,500 lm 25,000 lm 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K Colour temperature Colour rendition index Ra 70 70 65

Chapter 4 / 21

42,500 lm 4,000 K/5,400 K 70

All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturers data.

LBS code

Description Philips GE Sylvania

System power

Osram

Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps T16 /840 Fluorescent lamp 16 mm light colour 840 Starcoat T5 F/T5/840 ------T5 Circline --T5 Luxline Plus FHE/840, FHO/840 ---

1480 W

Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) a comparison of models and manufacturers descriptions

22 / Chapter 4
MASTER TL5 HE/HO Super 80/840 MASTER TL5 HO/VHO TOP /830 TL5 HO Coloured Pro MASTER TL5C T8 Polylux XLR F /830 --Electronic Biax Biax S - 2 pin Biax D/E - 4 Pin Biax T/E - 4 Pin Biax L - 4 pin --T8 Luxline Plus F /830 --Mini-Lynx T /E27 Lynx-S Lynx-DE Lynx-TE Lynx-LE --MASTER PL-C 4 Pin MASTER PL-T TOP 4 Pin MASTER PL-L 4 Pin ---

T16-I /830

24120 W

T16-bu

Fluorescent lamp 16 mm amalgam techn. light colour 830 Fluorescent lamp 16 mm blue

1480 W

T16-R(I)

2260 W

FH /840 HE; FQ /840 HO FQ /830 HO CONSTANT FH /67 HE; FQ /67 HO FC

T26 /830

Fluorescent lamp 16 mm circular (partly amalgam techn.) Fluorescent lamp 26 mm light colour 830

1558 W

L /830

T26-LL

Fluorescent lamp 26 mm long service life

1558 W

TC-TSE

530 W

TC-S

511 W

MASTER TL-D Super 80 /830 --MASTER TL-D Xtra/Xtreme DULUX EL E27 MASTER PL Electronic DULUX S MASTER PL-S 2 Pin

TC-DEL

1026 W

DULUX D/E

TC-TELI

1370 W

DULUX T/E IN

TC-L

1680 W

DULUX L (HE)

TC-LI

Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) with integral electr. ballast E27" screw-in cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 short double tube) only for conventional/low-loss ballast Compact fluorescent lamp (2 double tubes) G24q 4-pin cap for conv./low-loss/electr. ballasts Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) amalgam techn. GX24q 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 2G11 4-pin cap or 2GX11 Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 42G11 4-pin cap amalgam techn.

4080 W

DULUX L CONSTANT

The Lighting Handbook

LBS code
MASTER QL --A1/CL/E27 R80/E27 PAR38/E27 Q MR16 HI-SPOT ES 50 DLX-T Tube Satin Halogenstab Halogen Axial Normal E27 klar Refl. R80 PAR38 ---------

Description Philips GE Sylvania

System power Osram

--ENDURA

CLASSIC A CL CONCENTRA R80 CONCENTRA

Standard A55 CL Reflector NR80 PAR38 PAR38 HALOPAR 16 GU10 Twistline Pro Alu

HALOLUX CERAM

HALOLINE Capsuleline Pro STARLITE Brilliantline Pro Dichroic

HalogenA Pro E27 AM Plusline Pro

--Tubular FR K /Q T3/CL Q T3/12V GY6.35 GY6,35

HALOSTAR

Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) a comparison of models and manufacturers descriptions

DECOSTAR

Precise MR16 /CG SUPERIA 50 AR111 12V FL ---

Induction lamps LMG-IHf Ball-shaped induction lamp 55165 W LMG-SIHf Double-tube induction lamp 70150 W Incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps Incandescent GLS lamp 60 mm transp. 1575 W A60 /c R80 Incandescent reflector lamp 80 mm 40100 W PAR38 Parabolic incandescent reflector lamp 60120 W 38/8" = approx. 122 mm QPAR51 /GU10 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 3550 W voltage, with parabolic aluminium reflector 51 mm GU10 cap QT32 /m Halogen incandescent lamp for mains volt., 60250 W tube-shaped 32 mm frosted outside QT-DE12 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 602000 W voltage, cap at both sides 12 mm QT12-ax-LP LV halogen incandescent lamp approx. 20100 W 12 mm axial filament low-pressure system Low-pressure 12 V QR-CBC51 LV halogen incandescent lamp with 2065 W cold-light specular reflector 51 mm and glass cover QR111 /24 LV halogen incandescent lamp with 35100 W reflector 111 mm Radiation angle 24

Chapter 4 / 23

HALOSPOT 111 FL Aluline Pro 111 24D

LBS code
HPL-N --MASTER Colour CDM-T SuperMini CMH/T, CMH/TC CMI-TC CMI-TD UVS Britelux HSI-SX/P --ConstantColor CMH /T/UVC CMI-T UVS Arcstream ARC/T HSI-T Kolorlux Standard HSL-BW

Description Philips GE Sylvania

System power

Osram

HQL

Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) a comparison of models and manufacturers descriptions

24 / Chapter 4
MASTER Colour CDM-Tm, CDM-TC, CDM-Elite-TC MASTER Colour CDM-TD MASTER HPI Plus BU-P ConstantColor CMH /TD/UVC ----MASTER SDW-TG MASTER SOX --SLP

HQI-T

High-pressure discharge lamps HME High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 501000 W ellipsoidal HIT Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 35150 W quartz discharge tube HIT-CE UVr Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 35250 W ceramic discharge tube, reduced UV radiation HIT-TC-CE Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 2070 W ceramic discharge tube, compact design

HCI-T

HCI-TF PB, HCI-TC PB

HIT-DE-CE

HCI-TS

HIE-P

HQI-E/P

---

NAV-T SUPER MASTER SON-T Pro Lucalox LU /HO/T/40 SHP-TS

Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, cap at 35250 W both sides, with ceramic discharge tube Metal halide lamp, ellipsoidal, with quartz 70400 W discharge tube and anti-burst tube for open luminaires HST-CRI GX12 High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 50100 W tube-shaped, colour-improved, GX12 cap HST-MF High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 501000 W tube-shaped, increased luminous flux Low-pressure discharge lamps LST Low-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 18180 W tube-shaped

SOX

The Lighting Handbook

The Lighting Handbook m agneti c l ow-l oss b. el e c t r o ni c ba l l a st

Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h System power in W

Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature

Luminous flux in lm (at 25C)

Max. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h

Fluorescent lamps T 16 14 W T 16 21 W T 16 24 W T 16 28 W T 16 35 W T 16 39 W T 16 49 W T 16 54 W T 16 80 W T16-I 24 W T16-I 39 W T16-I 49 W T16-I 54 W T16-I 80 W T16-I 95 W T16-I 120 W T 16-R 22 W T 16-R(I) 40 W T 16-R(I) 55 W T 16-R(I) 60 W T 26 18 W T 26 36 W T 26 58 W 25 42 66 13,000 13,000 13,000 1618 24 27 3133 3941 46 54 61 approx. 88 27 46 54 61 approx. 88 approx. 105 approx. 130 26 4547 60 66 1920 36 5457

Characteristic values of the major lamps

ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw

80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 GX5 GX5 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 G13 G13 G13

1,200 1,900 1,750 2,600 3,300 3,100 4,300 4,450 6,150 1,950 3,400 4,750 4,850 6,800 7,300 9,200 1,800 3,200 4,000 5,000 1,350 3,350 5,200

2024,000 84 2024,000 87 2024,000 74 2024,000 93 2024,000 93 2024,000 76 2024,000 90 2024,000 81 2024,000 82 24,000 72 24,000 74 24,000 88 24,000 80 24,000 approx. 77 24,000 approx. 70 24,000 approx. 71 12,000 69 12,000 71 12,000 67 12,000 76 1620,000 68 1620,000 89 1620,000 93

Chapter 4 / 25

* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)

m agneti c l ow-l oss b. el e c t r o ni c ba l l a st

26 / Chapter 4
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
15 17 23 31 17 23 31 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000

Lamp name System power in W Lamp Max. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W

Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra

Luminous flux in lm (at 25C)

25 30 42 8,000

Compact fluorescent lamps TC-D/-DEL 10 W ww, nw TC-D/-DEL 13 W ww, nw TC-D/-DEL 18 W ww, nw TC-D/-DEL 26 W ww, nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 13 W ww, nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 18 W ww, nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 26 W ww, nw TC-TEL(I) 32 W ww, nw TC-TEL(I) 42 W ww, nw TC-TEL(I) 57 W ww, nw TC-TELI 60 W ww, nw TC-TELI 70 W ww, nw TC-TELI 85 W ww, nw TC-TELI/-QELI 120 W ww, nw TC-L 18 W ww, nw TC-L 24 W ww, nw TC-L 28 W ww, nw TC-L 36 W ww, nw TC-L 40 W ww, nw TC-L 55 W ww, nw TC-L 80 W ww, nw TC-LI 40 W ww, nw 8,000 8,000 12 14 1820 28 14 1820 28 3536 4647 62 65 75 92 128 19 2527 31 3439 45 5561 85 45 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 20,000 10,000 20,000 20,000 10,000 10,000 12.000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 50 64 66 64 64 66 64 68 69 69 62 70 65 70 63 72 90 85 77 87 71 78

80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

G24d-1/q-1 G24d-1/q-1 G24d-2/q-2 G24d-3/q-3 GX24d-1/q-1 GX24d-2/q-2 GX24d-3/q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-5 2G8 GX24q-6 2G8 2G8 2G11 2G11 2GX11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11

600 900 1,200 1,800 900 1,200 1,800 2,400 3,200 4,300 4,000 5,200 6,000 9,000 1,200 1,800 2.750 2,900 3,500 4,800 6,000 3,500

Characteristic values of the major lamps

* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)

The Lighting Handbook

The Lighting Handbook m agneti c l ow-l oss b. el e c t r o ni c ba l l a st

Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h

5561 85 55 85 165 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 3,000 3,000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000
** Axial luminous intensity in cd.

Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature System power in W

10.000 10.000 60,000 60,000 60,000 87 71 64 71 73 23 23 16 18 10 10 17 18 19 21 22 23

Luminous flux in lm (at 25C)

Max. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h

80 80

2G11 2G11

4.800 6.000

80 80 80

Special Special Special

3,5503,650 6,1006,300 12,000

Compact fluorescent lamps TC-LI 55 W ww, nw TC-LI 80 W ww, nw Induction lamps LMG-IHf 55 W (QL 55 W) ww, nw LMG-IHf 85 W (QL 85 W) ww, nw LMG-IHf 165 W (QL 165 W) ww, nw Low-voltage halogen lamps QT 12 35 W ww QT 12 50 W ww QR-CBC 51 35 W (860) ww QR-CBC 51 50 W (860) ww QR 111 75 W (845) ww QR 111 100 W (845) ww High-voltage halogen lamps QT-DE 12 48 W ww QT-DE 12 80 W ww QT-DE 12 120 W ww QT-DE 12 160 W ww QT-DE 12 230 W ww QT-DE 12 400 W ww

90 90 90 90 90 90

GY6,35 GY6,35 GU5,3 GU5,3 G53 G53

860 1,180 70014,000 85015,000 1,70030,000 2,80048,000

Characteristic values of the major lamps

90 90 90 90 90 90

R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s R7s

815 1.450 2.300 3.300 5.000 9.000

Chapter 4 / 27

* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)

m agneti c l ow-l oss b. el e c t r o ni c ba l l a st

28 / Chapter 4
System Lamp power service life* in W in h
8083 172 6,000 6,000

Lamp name System power in W Lamp Max. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W

Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra

Luminous flux in lm (at 25C)

72 ca, 160 8083 172 ca, 24 4245 8083 4245 8083 172

912,000 912,000 6,000 6,000 7,5009,000 912,000 912,000 912,000 912,000 612,000 612,000

Metal halide lamps HIE 70 W HIE 100 W HIE 150 W HIE 250 W HIE 400 W HIE 1,000 W HIE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 100 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) HIT 70 W HIT 150 W HIT 250 W HIT-TC-CE 20 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 35 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 35 W (Ceramic)) HIT-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 250 W (Ceramic) 63 72 74 93 93 90 83 71 84 91 69 77 76 71 83 91 83 83 83 96

Characteristic values of the major lamps

ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw, tw nw, tw nw ww, nw ww ww, nw ww ww, nw ww, nw nw, tw ww ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw ww, nw

80, 70 E27 4,9005,000 8296 6,000 80, 70 E27 7,3008,100 112115 6,000 80, 70 E27 10,50012,500 168177 6,000 90, 70, 60 E40 17,00025,500 275285 6,000 90, 70, 60 E40 20,50043,000 400460 6,000 60 E40 95,000 1,0501,065 6,000 90, 80 E27 5,0006,000 85 912,000 80 E27 8,0008,500 120 12,000 90, 80 E27 12,00013,500 170 912,000 80 E40 24,500 270 12,000 80 G12 5,2005,500 8296 6,000 80 G12 13,000 168177 6,000 90, 70, 60 E40 19,00021,000 275285 6,000 80 PGJ5/G8,5/GU6,5 1,6151,700 90, 80 PGJ5/G8,5 3,0003,500 4446 9,000 90, 80 G8,5 6,3007,300 8296 9,000 90, 80 G12 3,1003,500 4446 9,000 90, 80 G12 6,4007,300 8296 9,000 80 G12 14,000 168177 6,000 90, 80 E40/G22/G12 23,00025,800 272 612,000

* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)

The Lighting Handbook

The Lighting Handbook m agneti c l ow-l oss b. el ec t r o ni c ba l l a st

Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h

8083 172 4245 8083 172 10,000 715,000 1215,000 8296 168177 275285 4046 8995 168177 275 266270 425 8,000 8,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 10,000 7,000 12,000 12,000 6,000 6,000 75 75 72 85 79 80 89 48 51

Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature System power in W

Luminous flux in lm (at 25C)

Max. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h

90, 80 90, 80, 70 90, 80, 70 80 90, 80 90, 80 80

RX7s RX7s Fc2 RX7s RX7s RX7s Fc2

5,0006,000 11,250 20,000 3,2003,400 5,7007,000 13,50014,200 24,500

40 40

E40 E40

13,000 22,000

Metal halide lamps HIT-DE 70 W ww, nw HIT-DE 150 W ww, nw, tw HIT-DE 250 W ww, nw, tw HIT-DE-CE 35 W (Ceramic) ww HIT-DE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww, nw HIT-DE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww, nw HIT-DE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww High-pressure mercury vapour lamps HME 250 W ww, nw HME 400 W ww, nw High-pressure sodium vapour lamps HSE 250 W ww HSE 400 W ww HST-CRI 35 W (SDW-T) ww HST-CRI 50 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST-CRI 100 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST 250 W ww HST 400 W ww 275285 440450 4142 62 114116 275 440450 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 62 112 10,000 10,000

Characteristic values of the major lamps

60, 20 E40 22,00032,000 60, 20 E40 36,00054,000 80 PG12-1 1,300 80 PG12-1/GX12-1 2,3002,400 80 PG12-1/GX12-1 4,9005,000 60, 20 E40 23,00033,000 60, 20 E40 37,00056,500

112 120 31 39 42 116 123

Chapter 4 / 29

* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) For an extensive table of lamp data, please refer to the Technical Appendix of the ZUMTOBEL product catalogue. All data without engagement. In case of doubt, please contact the lamp manufacturer.

Energy efficiency of luminaires

Most of the electrical power is consumed in the lamp and its control gear. In order to clarify the power consumption of the ballast/lamp system, the European Union has adopted the energy classification system (Directive 2000/55/ EC on energy efficiency requirements applicable to ballasts for fluorescent lamps has been superseded by EU Regulation 245/2009). The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index) classifies ballasts into seven categories: Class A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D Ballasts Dimmable electronic ballasts Reduced-loss electronic ballasts Electronic ballasts Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional ballast) Magnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional ballast)

Since 21 May 2002, it has been prohibited to sell class D ballasts; class C ballasts have ceased to be produced since 21 November 2005 at the latest. With effect from 2017, magnetic ballasts with EEI = B1 and B2 as well as electronic ballasts = A3 will be prohibited for use with fluorescent lamps and highpressure discharge lamps. Example for T26 36 W 840: EEI A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D 19 W (25 % dimming is equivalent to 50 % A3) 36 38 41 43 45 45

30 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

ZUMTOBEL names

DOD

DALI

DALI only

DSI

110 V

Heavy-duty e.b. Electr. ballast

Luminaires can be dimmed collectively No readdressing required when replacing control gear Luminaires can be dimmed collectively Can be used with some reservations in emergency lighting installations Long service life up to 100,000 h Ambient temperatures up to 70 C Integral over-/ undervoltage identification

Switchable at zero power Dimmability subsequently enabled Dimmability DALI-addressable Configurable Error and status feedback Dimming automatically blocked in DC mode Emergency lighting level adjustable for DC mode Emergency lighting-compatible DC mode Critical operating conditions

Overview of electronic ballasts

Special features

DALI-switchable Dimming function can be enabled subsequently via Litenet

Addressability: Addressability: individual individual dimming dimming Flexible grouping Flexible grouping without rewiring without rewiring Luminaire status Luminaire status feedback feedback DSI control also possible

Chapter 4 / 31

For detailed information on ambient conditions and conditions of use, please refer to the product data sheets.

Long lamp service life High-quality light thanks to high-frequency operation More application options owing to DC operation Faulty lamps automatically switched off and switched on again after lamp replacement

Power consumption 20 to 88 %

Energy saving at normal operation Set-AC

compared with conventional ballasts 20 % to 88 % at 1 % dimming level (off)

fucntion of dimmer setting

558 W P C A 69 W 8W

Power consumption as a

55 W 45 W 35 W 25 W 8W

8W 1%

100 % 75 % 50 % 25 % Conventional ballast Controlled by LUXMATE Dimmer setting

9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 Power requirement of a traditional freestanding luminaire

Potential energy savings using daylight sensors and presence detectors

up to 70 % compared with constant light e.g. freestanding luminaire using SensControl

Power requirement of a freestanding luminaire using SensControl

absent

increasing daylight

sufcient daylight

decreasing daylight

Light required in terms of ergonomics using SensControl

Set-DC 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 further potential saving of 27 % 10 0 59 53 48 43 39 35 30 28 AC-mode DC-mode potential energy saving of 52 % in (%)

Emergency lighting extra function in Tridonic PCA

Thanks to a reducible DC dimming level (Set-DC), the emergency lighting installation can be designed for reduced operation. At a luminous flux of 10 %, savings of up to 70 % are possible at DC operation.
The Lighting Handbook

32 / Chapter 4

absent

cloud cover

Power (W) 10 at 230 V DC

Overview of LED control gear

Cable length vs. active power for 24 V DC supply Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. Cable cross-section/length:
Output 10 W 15 W 20 W 30 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 90 W 100 W 110 W Current 0.417 A 0.625 A 0.833 A 1.250 A 1.667 A 2.083 A 2.500 A 2.917 A 3.333 A 3.750 A 4.167 A 4.583 A Voltage 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m 11.5 m 8.5 m 7.0 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.0 m 3.5 m 3.5 m 3.0 m 47.0 m 31.0 m 23.5 m 15.5 m 11.5 m 9.0 m 7.5 m 6.5 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.5 m 4.0 m 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 70.5 m 47.0 m 35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m 14.0 m 11.5 m 10.0 m 8.5 m 7.5 m 7.0 m 6.0 m 117.5 m 78.5 m 60.0 m 39.0 m 29.5 m 23.5 m 19.5 m 16.5 m 14.5 m 13.0 m 11.5 m 10.5 m

Please note: maximum voltage drop permissible = 0.7 V

RGB and dimming of LED luminaires For dimming applications, owing to partly high outputs and accordingly possible interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, other points must be taken into account: A: control unit to LED C004 amplifier The cable between control unit and amplifier (LED C004) may be up to 20 m long. Make sure that the minimum input voltage of the amplifiers control input is at least 12 V. B: LED C004 amplifier to first LED luminaire
The Lighting Handbook

C: control unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group In order to avoid interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, the use of shielded cables for the lead between control unit and LED luminaires is recommended for cables longer than 0.5 m. Even if cables are shielded, cables longer than 15 m may lead to electromagnetic compatibility interferences in highly sensitive areas. Chapter 4 / 33

D: mains unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group The maximum cable length between mains unit and last

LED luminaire is specified in the table. Control gear should possibly be placed next to the luminaires.

A C + Ch 1-3 Control unit e.g. C002, K211 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 + Mains unit 12/24 V e.g. K240 + Uin + Ch 1-3 Uin Amplifier + Ch 1-3 e.g. LED C004 Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 3 D B

LED luminaire

Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, switchable Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. In each case, they relate to the last luminaire in a group. It is assumed that the control gear operates at max. capacity for details, please refer to the control gears technical description. A minimum voltage of 4.5 V is assumed for each LED.

Please note: use copper cables. Cables must not be laid in parallel to mains/highvoltage conductors. Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, dimmable PWM The max. cable length to a groups last luminaire may be 13 m. The cable cross-section has to be > 0.25 mm2. For cables longer than 1.5 m, shielded cables have to be used.

Current for LED lum. 350 mA 700 mA

34 / Chapter 4

The Lighting Handbook

Cable cross-section/length 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 30.0 m 40.0 m 60.0 m 100.0 m 15.0 m 20.0 m 30.0 m 50.0 m

The Lighting Handbook

Mains

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit On/Off Dimming MICROS LED 24 V MICROS LED 24 V

Monochrome LED luminaires, voltage controlled 24 V

LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V MICROS LED 24 V

SYSTEMLED Flood

Mains

24 V-DC PWM

* These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage! LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V

DALI/DSI/switchDIM Mains

K210

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood*

24 V-DC PWM

LED-mains unit Max. 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or max. 3 x control voltage 010 V LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco

C001

SYSTEMLED Flood*

KAVA LED 24 V

Chapter 4 / 35

Mains

24 V-DC PWM

24 V RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours

SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB

DALI Mains

K211

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

Mains

24 V-DC

LED-mains unit 1 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear

24 V-DC PWM

C002

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

SYSTEMLED Deco RGB

KAVA LED RGB

Application C004 PWM amplifier for controlling LED objects with higher output
LEDOS 24 V mono/RGB

LED-mains unit PWM control signal (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K210, K211)

C004

The C004 amplifier is used where the luminaire output is higher than the output power of the control unit used.

SYSTEMLED Deco mono/RGB

KAVA LED mono/RGB

The Lighting Handbook

Autom. colour sequence with sequencer

24 V-DC PWM

Colour sequence can be selected with DALI, 010 V KAVA LED RGB KAVA LED RGB

36 / Chapter 4
SYSTEMLED Deco RGB SYSTEMLED Deco RGB

* These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage!

24 V-DC PWM

LED-mains unit 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or 3 x control voltage 010 V

C001

Mains

24 V-DC

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

LED-mains unit

24 V-DC PWM

DALI

C003

SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB

The Lighting Handbook

Mains

350 mA

LED-mains unit (constant current) ORILED 350 mA PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA On/Off Automatic colour sequence with sequencer, DALI 010 V Dimming

Monochrome 350 mA LED luminaires, currentcontrolled

Mains

350 mA PWM

LEDOS B 350 mA

PWM control signal (e.g. C001, K210) ORILED 350 mA PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA

LED-mains unit (constant current) dimmable via PWM

LEDOS B 350 mA

Mains

24 V-DC

350 mA RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours, current-controlled

PASO II RGB 350 mA

LED-mains unit PWM control signal C350 PWM dimmer (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K211)

350 mA PWM

Mains

350 mA PWM

LEDOS B RGB 350 mA

Dali

K350 DALI RGB Constant-current converter PASO II RGB 350 mA

Chapter 4 / 37

LEDOS B RGB 350 mA

Chapter 5

Lighting and room management

LUXMATE lighting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Easy dimming with DIMLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug & play with ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creative solutions with EMOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building-wide with LITENET and DALI . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUXMATE field level (extract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

LUXMATE lighting management The intelligent control system for individual rooms and throughout buildings
Function Applications LUXMATE LITENET (based on TCP/IP and DALI) artificial light/daylight/blinds office building with high maximum flexibility owing to requirements in terms reconfiguration by software of flexibility, ergonomic com can be subsequently upgraded patibility and econ. efficiency with extra functions (on demand) OPC and BACnet interfaces with other building services and BMS optimised for TASK AREA concepts according to EN 12464 integration of ONLITE emergency lighting system customised control concepts LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (based on LUXMATE bus system) artificial light/daylight/blinds conference rooms interfaces to media technology office buildings integration of ONLITE shopping malls emergency lighting system museums link to BMS and central industry maintenance LUXMATE EMOTION (based on DALI) presence-based/daylight-based control shops timer Health & Care special luminaires: RGB, Tempura wellness ACTIVE LIGHT lighting concepts control rooms flexibility of individual offices addressing/grouping in the home ZBOX (based on DALI) lighting scenes RGB colour control nightlogic Webtool

LITENET

ZBOX BASIC

EMOTION

2 / Chapter 5

The Lighting Handbook

LUXMATE DIMLITE (based on DSI/DALI/dimsave) daylight-based corridors, hallways infrared remote control unit small offices standard switch components commercial premises no addressing, group dimming classrooms zero-power switching and dimming

PROFESSIONAL

hotels private dwellings old-age homes patient and nursing rooms

The Lighting Handbook

LUXMATE control unit

Lamp control gear (electronic ballast, transformer, ...)

Two steps to create your lighting solution

1. select appropriate lamp control gear

Dimming with LUXMATE DIMLITE

Lamps GLS lamps PAR lamps HV halogen incandescent lamps LV halogen incandescent lamps Fluorescent lamps LED

Dimming range 0100 % 0100 % 0100 % 0100 % 1100 % 0100 %

All control gear with DALI/DSI control input Phase dimmer: 50010005000 VA Phase dimmer: 50010005000 VA Phase dimmer: 50010005000 VA electronic dimmable transformer: 105 VA + 150 VA electronic dimmable ballast electronic dimmable LED converter 1 ch./3 ch.

2. select control funtion required

Module name for DSI/DALI/dimsave DIMLITE single DIMLITE daylight DIMLITE 4ch* (4-channel) DIMLITE 2ch* (2-channel)
All modules available for installation in luminaire or recess into ceiling * only available as housing for installation in switch cabinet

Function 1 channel dimming, lighting scene, presence 2 channels dimming, daylight, presence 2 or 4-channel multifunction

Chapter 5 / 3

Control momentary-action switch, presence detector momentary-action switch, presence detector, light sensor momentary-action switch, Circle, light sensor, presence detector, IR remote control unit

User control units

Control units

Lamp control gear

Lamps

LUXMATE DIMLITE single

max. 25 control gear

Dimming via control by momentary-action switch

4 / Chapter 5
L N D1 D2 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL dimsave DALI/DSI electronic ballast Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL L N DA-B DA-B

L N PE

Mains 230 V/50 Hz AC

Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/Off/Dimming

DALI/DSI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm max. length 100 m

DA DA

Conventional momentary-action light switch Scene

L N T T PIR Sc

DIMLITE single

or
L N D1 D2 DALI/DSI phase dimmer L' N

Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps

or
DALI/DSI transformer

L L N PE T D
D1 D2

Conventional presence detector phase dimmed phase * Light level can be stored NEW: snapsnap-on strain relief neutral and called up protective earth momentary-action switch input ** Alternative: If a single momentary-action switch is used, control line terminals T and T must be connecearth ted by a wire bridge. AC voltage LV halogen incandescent lamps max. 2 m

Arguments for your customers

absolutely flicker-free, synchronous dimming easy programming and call-up of lighting scenes presence detector can be integrated, 3 functional profiles: ON, ON + OFF, CORRIDOR dimming range max. 1 % to 100 % (dimsave 10 %100 %)

can be operated by any standard momentary-action light switch several momentary-action switches can be connected in parallel DALI/DSI/dimsave auto identification (no mixed mode) easy installation designs available: installed in luminaire, recessed into ceiling (using strain relief supplied) or already built into luminaire

The Lighting Handbook

Daylight-based control with DIMLITE daylight and DIMLITE multifunction

Applications single and team offices areas near windows in shopping centres classrooms industrial bays gym halls warehouses

50 %

500 lx artificial light daylight

Arguments for your customers dims the lighting from 1001 %, based exactly on the daylight available accurate window-light sensor rather than error-prone roomlight sensor energy savings of up to 75 % brightness level can be changed at any time using momentaryaction dimmer switches economically priced short pay-back period long lamp service life option to connect presence detector
The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 5 / 5

ED-EYE/LSD sensor positioning

Vertical sensor positioning
5m 4m 3m 2.5 m 2m 1m 0m 10 0.4 m 1m 40 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m

Window height = 2.5 m

Horizontal sensor positioning

5m 4m 3m 2.5 m 2m 1m 0m 3m 2m 1m 60 0m 1m 2m 3m

Window width = 4.0 m

Built into luminaire Switch cabinet with LSD sensor with ED-EYE sensor
The Lighting Handbook

2 groups 4 groups

DIMLITE daylight

DIMLITE multifunction 2ch DIMLITE multifunction 4ch

6 / Chapter 5

The Lighting Handbook

Lamp control gear
Fluorescent lamps T26/T16/TCL/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

User control units

Control units

Lamps

L N PE

Mains 230 V/50 Hz AC

Group I (max. 25 control gear) DALI/DSI electronic ballast

Light sensor LSD Fluorescent lamps T26/T16/TCL/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

Light sensor line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm max. length 100 m

L N D1 D2

Daylight-based dimming

Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/off Dimming Fluorescent lamps T26/T16/TCL/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

G II

L N T1 T2 PIR/Sc

DIMLITE daylight

S1 S2 G1 DA DA G2 DA DA

LUXMATE DIMLITE daylight

Conventional presence detector Fluorescent lamps T26/T16/TCL/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

NEW: Snap-on strain relief

dimsave L N DA-B DA-B Group II (max. 25 control gear) DALI/DSI electronic ballast L N D1 D2

L N PE T D

phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input control line earth AC voltage

Alternatively: Conventional momentaryaction light switch scene

DALI/DSI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm max. length 300 m

dimsave L N DA-B DA-B

Arguments for your customers

Chapter 5 / 7

absolutely flicker-free, synchronous dimming automatic daylight-based control alternatively: integration of one lighting scene or a presence detector possible presence detector with 3 functional profiles: ON, ON + OFF, CORRIDOR dimming range max. 1 % to 100 % (dimsave 10 %100 %)

DIMLITE MULTIFUNCTION
Arguments for your customers compact lighting control unit for 2/4 luminaire groups switching possible between DALI/dimsave/DSI reducing stand-by loss: automatic power disconnection of lighting actuators via integrated relay up to 3 lighting scenes, one of them with daylight-based control (depending on additional devices) modular range of functions, to be individually combined: daylight-based control lighting scene module presence detectors/movement sensors group module infrared remote control unit CIRCLE comfort control unit AUTO setup: automatic initialisation, no addressing required Design notes DIMLITE multifunction 2ch two-channel unit and DIMLITE multifunction 4ch four-channel unit are identical except for the number of output channels and corresponding key inputs. Maximum cable length for all control lines (Control-IN, DSI and DALI): max. 300 m each at 1.5 mm. The DIMLITE outputs are DALI, dimsave or DSI broadcast no addressing is required during commissioning. Groups are assigned by wiring the lighting actuators accordingly. Maximum of 25 DALI units (25 DALI loads) or 50 DSI units per output channel. Only Zumtobel ED units may be connected to Control-IN. Maximum of 8 ED units at Control IN (exception: max. 1 light sensor). Up to 3 lighting scenes, depending on the control unit used; each control unit will always call up the same scene 1, 2, 3 or OFF. The functions of the ED-SDED2 ED unit may be selected using the integrated rotary switch: either scene module (1, 2, 3, OFF) or group module (dimming of Group 1, 2, 3, 4). Conventional 230 V momentary-action switches can be connected to the momentary-action switch inputs. PIR input to connect a conventional movement sensor. Relay for mains cut-off: 16 A resistive load; in case of higher loads or capacitive/inductive loads, an external power contactor is recommended.

8 / Chapter 5

The Lighting Handbook

DIMLITE

L 230 V AC N PE LED-Eye ED-Sens IRlight sensor (PD+IR) TOUCH Multi-sensor DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) L N DA PCA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) L N DA PCA DA T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL uorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL uorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL uorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL uorescent lamps

User control units

Control units

Lamp control gear

Lamps

ED-IR infrared receiver

ED-SDED2 ED-SDED2 Circle Cxx control point group lighting scene module comf. contr. unit module

Load contactor (optional)

Multifunctional lighting control

max. 300 m at 1.5 mm 2 max. 8 ED units

optional mains isolation facility

Relay DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) L N DA PCA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) L N DA PCA DA TE one4all (1 DALI load) L N DA DA

max. 300 m at 1,5 mm 2 max. 25 DALI or 50 DSI per channel

Control IN

Channels 3+4 only with DIMLITE 4 ch

e.g. incandescent lamps

Presence detector

Chapter 5 / 9

Lighting scene/autom. daylight-based control All groups

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

dimsave Saving energy and resources

Flicker-free dimming from 10 to 100 % Simple control using standard momentary-action switches or DIMLITE No commissioning or addressing DC-compatible, with xed 15 % dimming level Extremely low power consumption in standby mode Dimming curve matched to suit the way in which human eyes perceive brightness For all uorescent lamps and wattages

FAQ Can dimsave be used in EIB installations? The unit is controlled using DSI. We dont know of any EIB-DSI gateways. Is dimsave available as a multi-watt unit? No, only single-watt units are available for economic reasons. Control? By DSI signal. Can lamp faults be read out via the bus? No, there is no feedback channel. Cabling of dimsave? The same guidelines apply as for DALI installations. Mains power cabling, maximum length of control line: 300 m, at 1.5 mm. Recommended control of dimsave: a) switchDIM, i.e. momentary10 / Chapter 5

action standard switch for input; not more than 2 electronic ballasts shared by one momentary-action switch b) DIMLITE product range How are luminaires grouped in a dimsave installation? As usual with DIMLITE, via the cabling; each lighting group has its own control signal and control line. Can dimsave be used in emergency lighting installations? Yes. Only in installations without central monitoring. Please note: fixed DC dimming level of 15 %, cannot be changed. How can a faulty dimsave unit be replaced? Simply replace hardware; no commissioning or programming required.

The Lighting Handbook

Lamp control gear
max. length of DALI line 2 x 0.50 mm max. 116 m max. 174 m max. 232 m max. 300 m 2 x 0.75 mm 2 x 1.00 mm 2 x 1.50 mm >

User control units

Lamps

L Mains 230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz N PE L N DALI bus power supply DA DA

LUXMATE BASIC Circle Kit

DA DA

DALI-CSS DALI-CSW

DALI-based lighting control system for individual rooms

L N PE DA

phase neutral protective earth DALI control line earth AC voltage

optionally several control points

supply via DALI control line (3 DALI loads)

L DALI electronic ballast N PE PCA DA DA L DALI phase dimmer N PE DA APD DA L DALI transformer N PE DA TE DA * max. 64 DALI-compatible lamp control gear

Arguments for your customers

Chapter 5 / 11

three lighting scenes can be called up using intuitive control unit two luminaire groups can be individually dimmed control of a max. of 64 DALI-controllable luminaires luminaires addressed via control unit

several control units can be used in parallel easy installation personal lighting scenes can be stored

ZBOX plug & play system for hotel rooms, private dwellings and shops
Plug & Play pre-addressed and preprogrammed plug-in connectors local stand-alone or networked system web tool for fine-adjustment, no licence required FAQs What is the minimum load to be applied to the universal dimmer? 20 W How many luminaires may be connected to a ZBOX Controller? Max. of 300 W/channel or 10 DALI loads; total maximum output power per ZBOX: 16 A. Depending on the outputs of the luminaires used, a varying number of electronic ballasts may be used for an automatic circuit-breaker! What happens at the output side during a short circuit? The dimming module has been fitted with overload protection for lighting loads, extremely high inductive or capacitive loads may destroy the dimmer. The relay contact and the Controller have no overload protection; the electrician must ensure proper selectivity of the installation. Does one always have to use a CIRCLE control unit? 12 / Chapter 5 direct connection via TCP-IP transparency of costs can be upgraded 4 control points included DALI Broadcast (no addressing of loads, except for RGB/W) Via the SDED2 input module, conventional momentaryaction switches can be integrated. How can the ZBOX be upgraded? All LUXMATE bus units can be connected to the ZBOX Controller. It is also possible to network several Controllers. In this case, the plug & play function may not work. It makes sense to let an engineer do the commissioning. Can the ZBOX also be used for other applications? For other applications such as nursing homes, private dwellings or patient rooms, the function and control concept can be adjusted via the ZBOX. WEBTOOL. Product options available? The ZBOX is available as a full version or as simplified version ZBOX easy. With ZBOX easy, no RGB colour control and motor control are possible.

The Lighting Handbook

Left bed/reading Right bed/reading Group 1 Window Group 2

Bathroom Mirror

Ceiling

Wellness**

(not ZBOX easy)

Group 9 Blinds/curtain
(not ZBOX easy)

ZBOX wiring scheme

Group 8

Group 7

** Luminaire pre-addressed, 4 channels No phase dimmer

Ceiling Group 3

Entrance area

Ceiling

Group 5

Wall/table Group 4

optionally*

Group 6 * Every luminaire optionally connected to phase dimmer, DALI and/or relay

Chapter 5 / 13

LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting control system

Operation/supply
L N PE Mains 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

EMOTION Touch/EMOTION Touch C

Double momentaryaction switch

Momentaryaction or Presence standard detector switch

L N COM T 1 T 2 COM T 3 DA DA DA DA DALI 1 DALI 2 MKXP installation box (please order separately) COM T 4

DA DA EMOTION-BVS2* EMOTION-EYE (2 DALI loads) DA DA EMOTION-BV2*

max. 0.25 m COM T 1 T 2 T 3 T 4

DA DA

EMOTION-SDED2 (2 DALI loads) DA DA

DA DA Line 1: DALI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 max. length 300 m max. 64 users/addresses (99 DALI loads, actuators, inputs) Line 2: DALI control line e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 max. length 300 m max. 64 users/addresses (99 DALI loads, actuators, inputs)

EMOTION-SENS (4 DALI loads)

IR-TOUCH

Cable lengths of DALI control line

Conductor cross-sections DALI control line 2 2 2 2 x x x x 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.50 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 Cable length 116 174 232 300 m m m m

14 / Chapter 5

Lighting/emergency lighting
L N DA DA DALI electronic ballast one4all (1 DALI load) K1 K 1' L K2 N K 2' DA K3 DA K 3' EMOTION-4RUKS K4 (1 DALI load) K 4' DA DA EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) L N DA DA L' N EMOTION-APD (1 DALI load) max. 2 m TE one4all (1 DALI load) R G B DALI-LED converter (1 DALI load) L' N EMOTION-ANAS (1 DALI load) L N DA DA D1 D2 D1 D2 25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires NV halogen incandescent lamps Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps K K' e.g. incandescent lamps 12 11 10 9 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL

EMOTION-CSX (3 DALI loads)

L N DA DA

DA DA

L N DA DA

LED luminaires

L N DA DA

0/110 V units e.g. STARFLEX bre optics (1 DALI-Last)

DALI-2DSI (1 DALI load)

L N DA DA Locally supplied emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK NT1 NT3 LDE DO (2 DALI loads) L N DA DA Escape-sign luminaire LOCAL CHECK (1 DALI load) L N DA DA CTC luminaire (e.g. TEMPURA)

Chapter 5 / 15

LUXMATE LITENET for any size of building

Sensors

Control points

Windows

Screens Blinds

Control Sensors Luminaires points

LUXMATE bus

DALI 3 x 64 addresses PC with control software LITENET insite

LITENET flexis N2 LITENET with server function netlink

LITENET netlink

TCP/IP

LITENET economy up to 500 output addresses no server required

LITENET flexisN2 without rotating parts (wear-free) optional LITENET incontrol operating software

Sensors

Control points

Windows

Screens Blinds

Control Sensors Luminaires points

LUXMATE bus

DALI 3 x 64 addresses PC with control software LITENET insite

LITENET flexis N3 LITENET with server function netlink

LITENET netlink

TCP/IP

LITENET compact up to 2,000 output addresses no server required LITENET flexis N3 in 19" rack

fail-safe thanks to RAID1 optional LITENET incontrol operating software optional BACnet and OPC interfaces

16 / Chapter 5

The Lighting Handbook

Sensors

Control points

Windows

Screens Blinds

Control Sensors Luminaires points DALI 3 x 64 addresses

LUXMATE bus

LITENET server

TCP/IP

LITENET flexis N1

LITENET netlink

PC with control software LITENET insite

LITENET flexibel up to 10,000 output addresses (or more upon request) can be cascaded as required LITENET flexis N1 installed in switch cabinet

LITENET server extremely fail-safe thanks to RAID1 optional LITENET incontrol operating software optional BACnet and OPC interfaces

DALI a must for modern office buildings

Benefits of DALI installation: Individual addressing As each luminaire can be addressed individually, the highest flexibility requirements can be met and installation faults can be avoided. Luminaires are grouped and assigned to control units subsequently, via the easy to use LITENET-insite software. Status feedback from each individual luminaire Detailed knowledge about the installations state enable the operator to optimise operation and maintenance. Moreover, current alarms can be displayed by screen, printer, e-mail or text message. Zero-power switching Both installation effort and space required in the switch cabinet are reduced, as a switched phase is not required for each luminaire.
The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 5 / 17

LUXMATE field level (extract)

Commissioning/user control units
LM-MPO LM-CIRIA LM-CPA/CPO Single-room LM-XPO solution Single-/ Multi-room solution LM-PFC Installation-specic operation IRED LM-IRB

LM-CS(X) control point RS 232 link to AV system ASCI plain text protocol B1, B2 LM-SI03 L, N IRS B1, B2, L, N
24VDC 24VAC

B 1 , B 2 , L, N B 1 , B 2 , L, N

B1, B2 L, N
230 VAC

B1 , B2

LM-SDED LM-SWED LM-RFR

LUXMATE bus Mains DSI- or DALI control line Sensor cable For dimming and switching individual luminaire groups

EnOcean Function switch without battery

Room management/central control/automation

Screen B1, B2 B1, B2 K1 Blinds Motor 1 LM-2LSE B1, B2 Blinds Motor 2 LM-2JSM

LM-RV Partition switch

L, N

B1, B2 LM-2FSE
L, N

B1, B2 LM-ZSM L, N Motor 2 Timer control

B1, B2 LM-iZSQ L, N Sequence automation

Motor 1

Window

Window LM-BVS35

B1, B2

L, N

18 / Chapter 5

Lighting management
LM-2RUK L, N B1, B2 K', K L, N Electronic/conventional ballast for discharge lamps HIT/HST/HME lamps

Switching
LM-DSI L, N B1, B2 up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts D1, D2 D1, D2 L, N

Fluorescent lamps

DSI dimming
up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts LM-2TL LM-2TL DALI L, N B1, B2 D1, D2 D1, D2 L, N D1, D2 Fluorescent lamps LSD option to connect a daylight sensor to the LM-2TL or LM-2TL/DALI up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts D1, D2 L, N

Daylight-based dimming (DSI or DALI)

DA, DA PCA LM-DALI L, N B1, B2 up to 64 ballasts in 16 groups D A, D A DA, DA TE DA, DA LED converter LED luminaires NV halogen incandescent lamps DA, DA APD Fluorescent lamps Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps

DALI dimming

ONLITE interface, emergency lighting

LM-DALIS

SB 64 Local check repeater

SB 128 local check CTP

locally supplied LOCAL CHECK emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK escape-sign luminaire

ONLITE interface for emergency lighting/local supply

Chapter 5 / 19

Chapter 6

Quickplan calculating the n of lum. required

Efficiency method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PANOS INF E150 H... 27 W LED WN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 PANOS INF E150 L... 27 W LED WN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 PANOS INF E200 H... 27 W LED WN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 PANOS INF E200 L... 27 W LED WN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 PANOS INF E200 H... 36 W LED WW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 PANOS INF E200 L... 36 W LED WW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 PANOS HF 200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 PANOS HG 200/250 TC-TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 PANOS HG 175/200/250 TC-DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PANOS LG 200 TC-TEL/TC-DEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 PANOS LG / M LG 250 TC-TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PANOS S 150/250 HIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PANOS S 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 PANOS Q Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 PANOS Q High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 VAERO-HA ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 VAERO-SA ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ELEEA LRO-D T16 AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ELEEA LRO-DI T16 AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ELEEA D-D T16 AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ELEEA D-DI T16 AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 AERO II T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 AERO II LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 LIGHT FIELDS A A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 LIGHT FIELDS A A-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 L-FIELDS ADV A T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 L-FIELDS ADV ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 L-FIELDS ADV E T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 L-FIELDS E T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 LIGHT FIELDS surface mounted TC-TELI . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ECOOS A T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Continued on next page

ECOOS ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAREENA A/E LED 935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT V Microprismatic (surface-mounted) . . MELLOW LIGHT V Microvane optic (surface-mounted) . MELLOW LIGHT V EM/EV LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIREL2 FEC2 ADV T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIREL2 FEC2 T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIREL RES-BWS T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL RAS-BWS T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL2 FAC2 T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MD-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MD-D T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MC-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free-standing uplights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON-I IP + louvre T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON-D ML-B and ML-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON-I D-ID + D-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON-I D PL (Poollight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOLINA-D/I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D TC-TELI RKF/RKID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D HQI-T/HIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERLUCE D/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHIARO FTR 390 / FTR 680 T16-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN C-O / C-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN A-O / A-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN S-C / S-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37 38 39 40 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76

Efficiency method
The Quickplan graphs have been calculated using the efficiency method. The following formulae can be used to give an approximate figure for the mean illuminance and the number of luminaires required. Em = n z L WF B A n= Em A z L WF B n = number of luminaires MF = maintenance factor A = floor area

Em = mean illuminance z = number of lamps per luminaire L = luminous flux of the lamp* B = utilization factor (= LB R ) LB = luminaire efficiency R = room utilization factor

standard UGR values and maintained luminance levels for luminance limit angle (e.g. 65 or 75) all around the luminaire correction factors for dark rooms and different ceiling heights (no. of luminaires x factor) maintenance factor uses an assumed value (graphs calculated using MF = 0.8) uniformity: max. luminaire spacing to achieve a uniformity greater than or equal to 0.7
Please note: with maximum spacing between luminaires, the illuminance level required is usually not achieved. * Luminaire efficiency generally relates to laboratory measurements at an ambient temperature of 25 C. For designing, it is therefore required to use the rated luminous flux levels of lamps at 25 C in the calculation programmes and/or when applying the efficiency method. Today, these values are usually calculated on a computer-aided basis, by accessing luminaire databases.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 6 / 3

500 lx 300 lx
54
HL/HM 27 W

PANOS INF E150 H... 27 W LED WN

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

4 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

HF/HG 27 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS INF E150 HF 27 W LED WN PANOS INF E150 HG 27 W LED WN PANOS INF E150 HL 27 W LED WN PANOS INF E150 HM 27 W LED WN

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 25 < 25 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
54
LL/LM 27 W

PANOS INF E150 L... 27 W LED WN

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

LF/LG 27 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS INF E150 LF PANOS INF E150 LG PANOS INF E150 LL PANOS INF E150 LM

27 W LED WN 27 W LED WN 27 W LED WN 27 W LED WN

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Chapter 6 / 5

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (LF/LG), 4.7 m (LL/LM)

500 lx 300 lx
54
HM 27 W

PANOS INF E200 H... 27 W LED WN

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

6 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

HG 27 W

HL 27 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS INF E200 HF 27 W LED WN PANOS INF E200 HG 27 W LED WN PANOS INF E200 HL 27 W LED WN PANOS INF E200 HM 27 W LED WN

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 25 < 25 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

HF 27 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
54
LL 27 W LM 27 W

PANOS INF E200 L... 27 W LED WN

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

LG 27 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS INF E200 LF PANOS INF E200 LG PANOS INF E200 LL PANOS INF E200 LM

27 W LED WN 27 W LED WN 27 W LED WN 27 W LED WN

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 22 < 200 cd/m < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m < 22 < 25 < 25 < 22 < 200 cd/m < 22

LF 27 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Chapter 6 / 7

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m, 4.7 m (LL/LM)

500 lx 300 lx
54
HL/HM 36 W

PANOS INF E200 H... 36 W LED WW

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

8 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

HF/HG 36 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS INF E200 HF 36 W LED WW PANOS INF E200 HG 36 W LED WW PANOS INF E200 HL 36 W LED WW PANOS INF E200 HM 36 W LED WW

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
54
LL/LM 36 W

PANOS INF E200 L... 36 W LED WW

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

LF/LG 36 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS INF E200 LF PANOS INF E200 LG PANOS INF E200 LL PANOS INF E200 LM

36 W LED WW 36 W LED WW 36 W LED WW 36 W LED WW

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Chapter 6 / 9

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m, 4.7 m (LL/LM)

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

PANOS HF 200/250
1/57 W (250)

10 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS HF 200 1/32 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 200 1/42 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 250 1/32 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 250 1/42 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 250 1/57 W TC-TEL

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 500 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 16 < 200 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

1/42 W (250)

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

1/32 W (200)

1/42 W (200)

1/32 W (250)

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

PANOS HF 200/250
2/42 W (250)

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS HF 200 2/14 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 200 2/17 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 250 2/32 W TC-TEL PANOS HF 250 2/42 W TC-TEL

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

2/32 W (250)

2/14 W (200)

2/17 W (200)

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Chapter 6 / 11

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

PANOS HG 200/250 TC-TEL

12 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0,25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/32 W (250) 1/42 W (250) 2/32 W (250)

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS HG 200 1/32 W TC-TEL PANOS HG 200 1/42 W TC-TEL PANOS HG 200 2/14 W TC-TEL PANOS HG 200 2/17 W TC-TEL PANOS HG 250 1/32 W TC-TEL PANOS HG 250 1/42 W TC-TEL PANOS HG 250 2/32 W TC-TEL

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 500 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 16 < 200 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

1/32 W (200) 1/42 W (200) 2/14 W (200) 2/17 W (200)

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

PANOS HG 175/200/250 TC-DEL

2/26 W (250)

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS HG 175 2/18 W TC-DEL PANOS HG 200 2/18 W TC-DEL PANOS HG 200 2/26 W TC-DEL PANOS HG 250 2/26 W TC-DEL

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

2/26 W (200)

2/18 W (175)

2/18 W (200)

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Chapter 6 / 13

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

PANOS LG 200 TC-TEL/TC-DEL

14 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/18 W TC-DEL 2/26 W TC-DEL

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS LG 200 1/26 W TC-TEL PANOS LG 200 1/32 W TC-TEL PANOS LG 200 2/14 W TC-TEL PANOS LG 200 2/17 W TC-TEL PANOS LG 200 2/18 W TC-DEL PANOS LG 200 2/26 W TC-DEL

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 25 < 25

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

1/26 W TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-TEL 2/14 W TC-TEL 2/17 W TC-TEL

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.7 m (TC-TEL), 2.7 m (TC-DEL)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
M LG 2/32 W

PANOS LG / M LG 250 TC-TEL

54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

LG 1/42 W

LG 2/32 W

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS LG 250 1/32 W TC-TEL PANOS LG 250 1/42 W TC-TEL PANOS LG 250 2/32 W TC-TEL PANOS M LG 250 2/32 W TC-TEL

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 25 < 22 < 28 < 25 < 25 < 25

LG 1/32 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Chapter 6 / 15

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.4 m (LG), 4.7 m (M LG)

500 lx 300 lx
36 30 24 18 12 6

PANOS S 150/250 HIT

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

16 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

150 1/70 W

250 1/70 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS S 150 1/35 W HIT-TC-CE G8.5 < 19 < 19 < 22 PANOS S 150 1/70 W HIT-CE G8.5 < 22 < 28 PANOS S 250 1/70 W HIT-DE < 28

150 1/35 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.73 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 1.2 m (150), 5.4 m (250)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
HIT G12 1/150 W

PANOS S 200
54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

HST GX12 1/150 W

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS S 200 1/100 W QR 111 PANOS S 200 1/100 W QT-LP 12 PANOS S 200 1/100 W HST GX12 PANOS S 200 1/150 W HIT G12

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 13 < 13 < 16 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 22

QR 111 1/100 W QT-LP 12 1/100 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.73 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Chapter 6 / 17

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 1.6 m (QR), 1.8 m (QT-LP), 2.3 m (HST, HIT)

500 lx 300 lx
54
LM 1/32 W

PANOS Q Low
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

LG 1/32 W

LL 1/32 W

18 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS Q LF 190 1/32 W TC-TELI PANOS Q LG 190 1/32 W TC-TELI PANOS Q LL 190 1/32 W TC-TELI PANOS Q LM 190 1/32 W TC-TELI

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 25 < 22 < 25 < 22 < 28 < 25 < 25 < 25

LF 1/32 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.4 m (LF/LG), 5.8 m (LL/LM)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
54
2/32 W 2/42 W

PANOS Q High
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/18 W

2/26 W

Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS Q HG 250 2/18 W TC-TELI PANOS Q HG 250 2/26 W TC-TELI PANOS Q HG 250 2/32 W TC-TELI PANOS Q HG 250 2/42 W TC-TELI

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 200 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m < 19

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 2.7 m

Chapter 6 / 19

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
E3 2/55 W

2LIGHT
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

20 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance
WF = 0.76 / 0.72* / 0.60**

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

E3 1/80 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 Ceiling height: 3 m 55 < 16 2LIGHT MINI A1 1/20 W HIT WFL < 1000 cd/m < 200 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2LIGHT E1 1/42 W TC-TELI < 19 < 22 2LIGHT E2 2/42 W TC-TELI < 22 < 19 2LIGHT E1 1/70 W HIT G8.5 TI < 16 < 200 cd/m < 25 2LIGHT E3 1/80 W TC-L MDW < 19 < 25 2LIGHT E3 2/55 W TC-L MDW < 22

A1 1/20 W

E1 1/42 W

E2 2/42 W E1 1/70 W

40 30 20 10 00 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
2000 h 1 year 1 year

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 1.1 m (1/20 W**) 2.2 m (1/70 W*), 4 m (1/42 W), 4.7 m (2/42 W, 1/80 W, 2/55 W)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
HA ID 2/80 W

VAERO-HA ID T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m VAERO-HA ID 2/35 W T16 VAERO-HA ID 2/49 W T16 VAERO-HA ID 2/54 W T16 VAERO-HA ID 2/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55 65 < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13

HA ID 2/54 W

HA ID 2/35 W

HA ID 2/49 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.75 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.5 m

Chapter 6 / 21

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
SA ID 2/54 W

VAERO-SA ID T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

22 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m VAERO-SA ID 2/35 W T16 VAERO-SA ID 2/49 W T16 VAERO-SA ID 2/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55 65 < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13

SA ID 2/49 W

SA ID 2/35 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.75 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.5 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

ELEEA LRO-D T16 AB

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m ELEEA LRO-D 1/28 W T16 AB ELEEA LRO-D 1/35 W T16 AB ELEEA LRO-D 1/49 W T16 AB ELEEA LRO-D 1/54 W T16 AB

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22

LRO-D 1/28 W

LRO-D 1/35 W LRO-D 1/49 W

LRO-D 1/54 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.4 m

Chapter 6 / 23

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

ELEEA LRO-DI T16 AB

24 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m ELEEA LRO-DI 1/28 W T16 AB ELEEA LRO-DI 1/35 W T16 AB ELEEA LRO-DI 1/49 W T16 AB ELEEA LRO-DI 1/54 W T16 AB

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 19

140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

LRO-DI 1/28 W LRO-DI 1/35 W LRO-DI 1/49 W LRO-DI 1/54 W

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.2 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
D-D 2/35 W

ELEEA D-D T16 AB

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

D-D 2/28 W

Ceiling height: 3 m ELEEA D-D 1/28 W T16 AB ELEEA D-D 1/35 W T16 AB ELEEA D-D 1/54 W T16 AB ELEEA D-D 2/28 W T16 AB ELEEA D-D 2/35 W T16 AB

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 1000 cd/m < 22 < 22 < 1500 cd/m < 22 < 22 < 1500 cd/m < 22

D-D 1/28 W

D-D 1/35 W

D-D 1/54 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.6 m

Chapter 6 / 25

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
D-DI 2/49 W

ELEEA D-DI T16 AB

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

26 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

D-DI 2/35 W

Ceiling height: 3 m ELEEA D-DI 1/35 W T16 AB ELEEA D-DI 1/54 W T16 AB ELEEA D-DI 2/28 W T16 AB ELEEA D-DI 2/35 W T16 AB ELEEA D-DI 2/49 W T16 AB

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19

D-DI 1/35 W D-DI 1/54 W D-DI 2/28 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.2 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/54 W 2/80 W

AERO II T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/35 W

2/49 W

Ceiling height: 3 m AERO II 2/28 W T16 AERO II 2/35 W T16 AERO II 2/49 W T16 AERO II 2/54 W T16 AERO II 2/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55 /65 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 13

2/28 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m

Chapter 6 / 27

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
18
2/54 W 2/80 W

AERO II LED
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5
15 12 9 6 3

28 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/35 W

2/49 W

Ceiling height: 3 m AERO II 48 W / 65 LED 2/28 W T16 AERO II 60 W / 65 LED 2/35 W T16 AERO II 60 W / 65 LED 2/49 W T16 AERO II 60 W / 65 LED 2/54 W T16 AERO II 60 W / 65 LED 2/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13

2/28 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/35 W 4/14 W

LIGHT FIELDS A A
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/28 W

Ceiling height: 3 m LIGHT FIELDS A A 2/28 W LIGHT FIELDS A A 2/35 W LIGHT FIELDS A A 4/14 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 1000 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Axial spacing up to 3.4 m

Chapter 6 / 29

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/54 W 4/24 W

LIGHT FIELDS A A-ID

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

30 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/49 W

Ceiling height: 3 m LIGHT FIELDS A A-ID 2/49 W LIGHT FIELDS A A-ID 2/54 W LIGHT FIELDS A A-ID 4/24 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Axial spacing up to 5.6 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/35 W 4/14 W

L-FIELDS ADV A T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/28 W

Ceiling height: 3 m L-FIELDS ADV A 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS ADV A 2/35 W T16 L-FIELDS ADV A 4/14 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 31

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (2/28 W, 2/35 W), 3.4 m (4/14 W)

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/54 W 4/24 W

L-FIELDS ADV ID T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

32 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/49 W

Ceiling height: 3 m L-FIELDS ADV ID 2/49 W T16 L-FIELDS ADV ID 2/54 W T16 L-FIELDS ADV ID 4/24 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/35 W 4/14 W

L-FIELDS ADV E T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/28 W

Ceiling height: 3 m L-FIELDS ADV E 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS ADV E 2/35 W T16 L-FIELDS ADV E 4/14 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 33

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (2/28 W, 2/35 W), 3.4 m (4/14 W)

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/35 W 4/14 W

L-FIELDS E T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

34 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/24 W

2/28 W

55 UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 Ceiling height: 3 m < 1500 cd/m L-FIELDS E 2/24 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m L-FIELDS E 2/28 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m L-FIELDS E 2/35 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m L-FIELDS E 4/14 W T16 < 16 < 16

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Axial spacing up to 3.4 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

LIGHT FIELDS surface mounted TC-TELI

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m LIGHT FIELDS E 1/42 W TC-TELI LIGHT FIELDS E 2/32 W TC-TELI

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19

1/42 W M625 2/32 W M625

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year

40 30 20 10 00 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.4 m

Chapter 6 / 35

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

ECOOS A T16
1/35 W 1/54 W

36 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

40 30 20 10 00 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

Ceiling height: 3 m ECOOS A 1/28 W T16 ECOOS A 1/35 W T16 ECOOS A 1/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 16

1/28 W

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4.6 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

ECOOS ID T16
1/49 W 1/54 W

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m ECOOS ID 1/28 W T16 ECOOS ID 1/35 W T16 ECOOS ID 1/49 W T16 ECOOS ID 1/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 16 < 19 < 16

1/28 W

1/35 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

40 30 20 10 00 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.7 m

Chapter 6 / 37

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36 30 24 18 12 6

CAREENA A/E LED 935

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

38 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

Ceiling height: 3 m CAREENA A 52 W LED 935 CAREENA E 52 W LED 935 M600 CAREENA E 52 W LED 935 M625

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55 65 < 16 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 16 < 16 < 1500 cd/m

E 52 W M600 E 52 W M625

A 52 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.76 12 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.8 m (A), 4 m (E)

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
AM 2/49 W T16

MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed)

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

AM 2/40 W TC-L

Ceiling height: 3 m ML IV A AM 1/54 W T16 ML IV B AM 2/24 W T16 ML IV B AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 ML IV B AM 2/40 W TC-L ML IV A AM 2/49 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 16 < 22 < 16 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 22 < 19

AM 1/54 W T16 AM 2/24 W T16 AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 39

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.8 m (2/24W + 2/24 W, 2/40 W), 5.9 m (2/24 W), 5.2m (1/54 W, 2/49 W)

500 lx 300 lx
36
1/49 W 1/54 W

MELLOW LIGHT V Microprismatic (surface-mounted) T16 1-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

40 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/28 W

1/35 W

Ceiling height: 3 m MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/28 W T16 M600/M625 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/35 W T16 M625 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/49 W T16 M625 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/54 W T16 M600/M625

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.4 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36 30
EM 1/55 W 600/625

MELLOW LIGHT V Microprismatic (surface-mounted) TC-L 1-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

50 24 18 12 6

Ceiling height: 3 m MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/40 W TC-L M600 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/40 W TC-L M625 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/55 W TC-L M600 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 1/55 W TC-L M625

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19

EM 1/40 W 600/625

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m

Chapter 6 / 41

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36 30 24 18 12 6

MELLOW LIGHT V Microprismatic (surface-mounted) 2-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

42 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

EM 2/40 W TC-L EM 2/49 + 2/54 W T16

Ceiling height: 3 m MELLOW LIGHT V EM 2/24 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 2/28 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 2/35 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 2/40 W TC-L MELLOW LIGHT V EM 2/49 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT V EM 2/54 W T16

M600/M625 M600/M625 M625 M600/M625 M625 M600/M625

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22

EM 2/24 W T16

EM 2/28 W T16

EM 2/35 W T16

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m, 4.7 m (2/24 W, 2/40 W)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36 30 24 18 12 6

MELLOW LIGHT V Microvane optic (surface-mounted) T16 1-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

EV 1/49 W

EV 1/54 W

65 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 1/28 W T16 M625 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 1/35 W T16 M625 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 16 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 1/49 W T16 M625 < 16 < 1000 cd/m < 16 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 1/54 W T16 M625 < 16 < 1000 cd/m

EV 1/28 W

EV 1/35 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.5 m

Chapter 6 / 43

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/49 W 2/54 W

MELLOW LIGHT V Microvane optic (surface-mounted) T16 2-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

44 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/35 W

65 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 1500 cd/m < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 2/24 W T16 M600/M625 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 16 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 2/28 W T16 M600/M625 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 2/35 W T16 M625 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 2/49 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 2/54 W T16 M600/M625 < 19

2/24 W

2/28 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (2/24 W), 4.7 m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
EV 2/40 W

MELLOW LIGHT V Microvane optic (surface-mounted) TC-L

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

EV 1/55 W

65 UGR_axial UGR_transv. Ceiling height: 3 m < 1000 cd/m < 16 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 1/40 W TC-L M600/M625 < 16 < 1500 cd/m < 16 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 1/55 W TC-L M600/M625 < 16 < 16 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 2/40 W TC-L M600/M625 < 19

EV 1/40 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m

Chapter 6 / 45

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
EV 60 W LED

MELLOW LIGHT V EM/EV LED

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

46 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

EM 60 W LED

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 Ceiling height: 3 m MELLOW LIGHT V EM 60 W LED M600/M625 < 22 < 19 MELLOW LIGHT V EV 60 W LED M600/M625 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.76 18 000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (EV), 5.4 m (EM)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
1/49 W 1/54 W

MIREL 2 FEC 2 ADV T16 1-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/28 W

1/35 W

Ceiling height: 3 m MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 1/28 W T16 MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 1/35 W T16 MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 1/49 W T16 MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 1/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 16 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 47

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m, 3.4 m (1/49 W)

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/49 W 2/54 W

MIREL 2 FEC 2 ADV T16 2-lamp

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

48 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/28 W

2/35 W

Ceiling height: 3 m MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 2/28 W T16 MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 2/35 W T16 MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 2/49 W T16 MIREL2 FEC2 ADV 2/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 16 < 500 cd/m < 19

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.4 m, 4 m (2/35 W)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36 30 24 18 12 6

MIREL 2 FEC 2 T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/24 W

2/54 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 Ceiling height: 3 m < 19 < 500 cd/m MIREL2 FEC2 1/28 W T16 M600/625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m MIREL2 FEC2 1/35 W T16 M600/625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m MIREL2 FEC2 1/54 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m MIREL2 FEC2 2/24 W T16 M600/625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m MIREL2 FEC2 2/54 W T16 M600/625 < 19

1/28 W

1/35 W

1/54 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.5 m

Chapter 6 / 49

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
18
3/80 W 4/80 W

MIREL RES-BWS T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
15 12 9 6 3

50 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/80 W

2/54 W

Ceiling height: 3 m MIRAL/MIREL RES-BWS 1/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RES-BWS 2/54 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RES-BWS 3/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RES-BWS 4/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (RES 1/80 W, 2/54 W), 4.7 m (RES 3/80 W, 4/80 W)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
18
3/80 W 4/80 W

MIRAL RAS-BWS T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
15 12 9 6 3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/80 W

2/80 W

Ceiling height: 3 m MIRAL/MIREL RAS-BWS 1/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS-BWS 2/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS-BWS 3/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS-BWS 4/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 51

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.9 m (RAS 1/80W, 2/80W), 3.5 m (RAS 3/80 W, 4/80 W)

500 lx 300 lx
54
2/54 W 4/14 W

MIRAL 2 FAC 2 T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/54 W

2/49 W

52 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Ceiling height: 3 m MIRAL2 FAC2 1/28 W T16 MIRAL2 FAC2 1/49 W T16 MIRAL2 FAC2 1/54 W T16 MIRAL2 FAC2 2/49 W T16 MIRAL2 FAC2 2/54 W T16 MIRAL2 FAC2 B 4/14 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19

1/28 W

1/49 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

WF = 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.8 m, 5.8 m (4/14 W)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/35 W 2/54 W

CLARIS II MD-ID T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/35 W

1/54 W

Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II MD-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 13 < 13 < 500 cd/m < 16 < 13 < 500 cd/m < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.9 m

Chapter 6 / 53

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

CLARIS II MD-D T16

1/49 W 1/54 W

54 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

40 30 20 10 00 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200

Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II MD-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II MD-D 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-D 1/49 W T16 CLARIS II MD-D 1/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 <19 < 500 cd/m < 19

1/28 W

1/35 W

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.5 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/35 W 2/54 W

CLARIS II MC-ID
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/35 W

1/54 W

Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II MC-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 16 < 16 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m < 16 < 16

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 55

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m (1-lamp), 5.2 m (2-lamp)

500 lx 300 lx
18
OPURA-S

Free-standing uplights
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5
15 12 9 6 3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

56 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.3 1.3 5m 1,7 1.4 6m 2,2 1.5

LANOS-S

KAREA-S

Ceiling height: 3 m LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/55 W TC-L LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/80 W TC-L CAPA-S-P, CAPA-S-L 4/28 W TC-L CAPA-S-P, CAPA-S-L 4/55 W TC-L LANOS-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L KAREA-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L OPURA-S 3/55 W TC-L

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 13

L-FIELDS-S 55 W

L-FIELDS-S 80 W

CAPA-S 28 W

CAPA-S 55 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.67 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 7.2 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
-I 2/54 W + R

TECTON(-I) + RW T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/54 W + RW

Ceiling height: 3 m TECTON 1/54 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/54 W T16 + PK+ RW TECTON 2/54 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/54 W T16 + R

UGR_axial UGR_transv. > 28 < 28 > 28 < 22 > 28 < 28 > 28 < 28

1/54 W + RW 1/54 W + PK + RW

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 6000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 57

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.9 m, 6.4 m (-I 2/54 W + R)

500 lx 300 lx
36
-I 2/80 W + R

TECTON(-I) + RW T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

58 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/80 W + RW

Ceiling height: 3 m TECTON 1/80 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/80 W T16 + PK+ RW TECTON 2/80 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/80 W T16 + R

UGR_axial UGR_transv. > 28 < 25 > 28 < 22 > 28 < 28 > 28 < 28

1/80 W + RW

1/80 W +PK + RW

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.77 6000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.9 m, 6 m (-I 2/80 W + R)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/54 W 2/80 W

TECTON-I IP + louvre T16

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/54 W

1/80 W

Ceiling height: 3 m TECTON-I IP 1/54 W T16 TECTON-I IP 1/80 W T16 TECTON-I IP 2/54 W T16 TECTON-I IP 2/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 25 < 22

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.80 6000 h 2 years 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 59

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.7 m (1-lamp), 5.6 m (2-lamp)

500 lx 300 lx
36
ML-C 2/54 W

TECTON-D ML-B + ML-C

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6

60 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

ML-C 2/49 W

Ceiling height: 3 m TECTON-D ML-B 2/49 W T16 TECTON-D ML-B 2/54 W T16 TECTON-D ML-C 2/49 W T16 TECTON-D ML-C 2/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 22 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 22 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 16

ML-B 2/49 W

ML-B 2/54 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.79 4000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m (ML-B), 4.5 m (ML-C)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
18
D-I 2/80 W

TECTON-I D-ID + D-I

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 (D-ID), 1.5 (D-I)
15 12 9 6 3
Lamp operation Maintenance Room maintenance

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

D-I 2/54 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55 Ceiling height: 3 m < 19 TECTON-I D-ID 2/54 W T16 < 19 < 19 TECTON-I D-ID 2/80 W T16 < 19 < 13 < 500 cd/m TECTON-I D-I 2/54 W T16 < 13 < 19 < 500 cd/m TECTON-I D-I 2/80 W T16 < 19

65 < 1000 cd/m < 1000 cd/m < 500 cd/m < 500 cd/m

D-ID 2/54 W

D-ID 2/80 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room
WF = 0.74 (D-DI) WF = 0.71 (D-I)

2000 h
1 year / year*

1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 61

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 3.7 m (D-ID), 7.2 m (D-I)

500 lx 300 lx
18
2/49 W 2/80 W

TECTON-I D PL (Poollight)
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
15 12 9 6 3

62 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/35 W

Ceiling height: 3 m TECTON-I D PL 2/35 W T16 TECTON-I D PL 2/49 W T16 TECTON-I D PL 2/80 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance WF = 0.73 2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
HIT 1/150 W

SOLINA D/I
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6
Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

HIT 1/70 W

Ceiling height: 3 m SOLINA D/I 1/42 W SOLINA D/I 1/57 W SOLINA D/I 1/70 W SOLINA D/I 1/150 W

TC-TELI TC-TELI HIT + RAP+ AG HIT + RAP+ AG

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 22

TC-TELI 1/42 W

TC-TELI 1/57 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room
WF = 0.75 (TC-T.) WF = 0.70 (HIT)

2000 h 1 year 1 year

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 63

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.5 m (TC-TELI), 4 m (HIT)

500 lx 300 lx
18 15 12 9 6 3

COPA I
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 Maintenance factor (WF)

64 / Chapter 6
Clean large room WF = 0.77 HQI WF = 0.77 NAV Lamp operation 4000 h 8000 h Cleaning of lum. (IP65) 1 year 3 years Room maintenance 1 year 3 years

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/400 W HQI 1/400 W NAV

Ceiling height: 6 m COPA I 1/250 W HQI-E/D-PRO RAB TST COPA I 1/250 W NAV-E RAB TST COPA I 1/400 W HQI-E/N + RAB COPA I 1/400 W NAV-E + RAB

(19000 lm) (27000 lm) (40000 lm) (48000 lm)

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 500 cd/m < 16 < 19 < 500 cd/m < 19 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25

1/250 W HQI 1/250 W NAV

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.6 m (1/250W HQI-E), 6.5 m (1/250 W NAV-E), 10.2 m (1/400 W HQI-E/N), 9.8 m (1/400 W NAV-E)

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

Floor area m

1/250 W HQI-E 1/250 W NAV-E 1/400 W HQI-E/N 1/400 W NAV-E

= Colour rendering index Ra 90 = Colour rendering index Ra 25 = Colour rendering index Ra 65 = Colour rendering index Ra 25

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
1/57 W RKID

COPA D TC-TELI RKF/RKID

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 5m 1.2 1.1 6m 1.4 1.2

60 30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/57 W RKF

Ceiling height: 4 m COPA D 1/42 W TC-TELI + RKF COPA D 1/42 W TC-TELI + RKID COPA D 1/57 W TC-TELI + RKF COPA D 1/57 W TC-TELI + RKID

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 25 < 25 < 22 < 22

1/42 W RKF

1/42 W RKID

Maintenance factor (WF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance

WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.8 m (1/42 W), 6.9 m (1/57 W)

Chapter 6 / 65

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
18 15 12 9 6 3
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 5m 1.2 1.1 6m 1.4 1.2

COPA D HQI-T / HCI-T

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1

66 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (WF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance WF = 0.77 2000 h 1 year 2 years

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/70 W HCI-T 1/150 W HCI-T

Ceiling height: 6 m COPA D 1/70 W HQI-T (5800 lm) COPA D 1/70 W HCIT/P NDL (6700 lm) COPA D 1/150 W HCI-T/P NDL (14500 lm)

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 28 < 1000 cd/m < 28 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 22 < 22

1/70 W HQI-T

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 10 m (HQI-T), 7 m (HCI-T)

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
18
2/250 W NAV-T

COPA A-B 250 W

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 Maintenance factor (WF)
15 12 9 6 3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/250 W NAV-T

Ceiling height: 6 m COPA A-B 1/250 W HQI-T/D (20000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HQI-T/D (40000 lm) COPA A-B 1/250 W NAV-T (28000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W NAV-T (56000 lm)

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 28 > 28 < 28 > 28 > 28 < 25 > 28

1/250 W HQI-T/D

2/250 W HQI-T/D

Clean large room WF = 0.77 (HQI) 0,81 (NAV) Lamp operation 2000 h 5000 h 1 year Cleaning of lum. (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years 2 years

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 7.9 m (2/250 W NAV-T), 9 m (2/250 W HQI-T/D), 11 m (1/250 W HQI-T/D, 1/250 W NAV-T)
HQIT/D = Colour rendering index Ra 90 NAV-T = Colour rendering index Ra 25

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

Chapter 6 / 67

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
18
1/400 W NAV-T

COPA A-B 400 W

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 Maintenance factor (WF)
Clean large room WF = 0.67 (HQI) / 0.81 (NAV) Lamp operation 4000 h Cleaning of lum. (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years

30 15 12 9 6 3

68 / Chapter 6 Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 10 m (HQI-T/N), 11 m (NAV-T)

HQIT/N = Colour rendering index Ra 65 NAV-T = Colour rendering index Ra 25

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/400 W HQI-T/N

Ceiling height: 6 m COPA A-B 1/400 W HQI-T/N (34000 lm) COPA A-B 1/400 W NAV-T (48000 lm)

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 28 > 28 > 28

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
O 2/18 W TC-L

PERLUCE D/O
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 (D), 1.25 (O) Maintenance factor (WF)

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

O 1/49 W T16

Ceiling height: 3 m PERLUCE D 1/49 W T16 PERLUCE D 1/80 W T16 PERLUCE O 1/49 W T16 PERLUCE O 2/18 W TC-L

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22

D 1/49 W T16

D 1/80 W T16

Clean large room WF = 0.77 (D) WF = 0.80 (O) Lamp operation 4000 h 2000 h 1 year Cleaning of lum. (IP54) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years 1 year

40 30 20 10 00 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10

86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4.3 m (D), 6.8 m (O)

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 69

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/54 W T16

RAIN
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

70 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

2/36 W T26

Ceiling height: 3 m RAIN 1/58 W T26 RAIN 1/80 W T16 RAIN 2/36 W T26 RAIN 2/54 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 28 < 25 > 28 < 28 < 28 < 22 > 28 < 25

1/58 W T26

1/80 W T16

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance WF = 0.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.8 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
54
2/40 W T16-R

CHIARO FTR 390 / FTR 680 T16-R

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 180 200

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/22 W + 140 W T16-R

Ceiling height: 3 m CHIARO FTR 1/40 W T16-R 390 CHIARO FTR 1/55 W T16-R 390 CHIARO FTR 1/22 W + 40 W T16-R 390 CHIARO FTR 2/40 W T16-R 390

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22

1/40 W T16-R

1/55 W T16-R

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance

WF = 0.74 6000 h 1 year 2 years

100

120

140

160

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.8 m

Chapter 6 / 71

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
1/80 W 2/49 W

SCUBA T16
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

72 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/49 W

1/54 W

Ceiling height: 3 m SCUBA PC 1/35 W T16 SCUBA PC 1/49 W T16 SCUBA PC 1/54 W T16 SCUBA PC 1/80 W T16 SCUBA PC 2/49 W T16

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 22 < 25 < 22 < 28 < 22

1/35 W

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance WF = 0.79 6000 h 1 year 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.8 m

Floor area m

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
2/58 W

SCUBA T26
Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 24 18 12 6

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

1/58 W

2/36 W

Ceiling height: 3 m SCUBA 1/36 W T26 SCUBA 1/58 W T26 SCUBA 2/36 W T26 SCUBA 2/58 W T26

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 28 < 22

1/36 W

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance WF = 0.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 6.8 m

Chapter 6 / 73

Floor area m

500 lx 300 lx
36
C-R 3/55 W TC-L

CLEAN C-O / C-R

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6
Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance

74 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

C-O 3/40 W TC-L

Ceiling height: 3 m CLEAN C-O 4/24 W T16 M625 CLEAN C-O 3/40 W TC-L M625 CLEAN C-R 3/55 W TC-L M625

UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 25 < 25 < 19 < 22

C-O 4/24 W T16

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room
WF = 0.79 (T16) WF = 0.73 (TC-L)

3000 h 2 years 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 5.8 m (C-O), 4 m (C-R)

The Lighting Handbook

500 lx 300 lx
36
A-C 3/55 W TC-L

CLEAN A-O / A-C

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
30 24 18 12 6
Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

A-C 3/40 W TC-L

Ceiling height: 3 m CLEAN A-O 2/49 W T16 M625 CLEAN A-C 2/49 W T16 M625 CLEAN A-C 3/40 W TC-L M625 CLEAN A-C 3/55 W TC-L M625

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 22 < 22 < 16 < 1000 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19

A-O 2/49 W T16

A-C 2/49 W T16

Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room
WF = 0.80 (T16) WF = 0.73 (TC-L)

4000 h (T16) 2 years 2 years

100

120

140

160

180

200

Chapter 6 / 75

Floor area m

Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to 4 m (T-16), 4.7 m (TC-L)

500 lx 300 lx
18
S-C 3/80 W

CLEAN S-R / S-C

Correction factors Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
15 12 9 6 3

76 / Chapter 6
Floor area Ceiling height up to 50 m over 50 m 4m 1.2 1.1 5m 1.4 1.2 6m 1.6 1.3

X=4H | Y=8H | S=0.25H | Reection factors 70/50/20

S-R 2/49 W

S-C 3/49 W

Ceiling height: 3 m CLEAN S-R 2/49 W CLEAN S-C 3/49 W CLEAN S-C 3/80 W

UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65 < 22 < 22 < 16 < 19 < 1500 cd/m < 19 < 19 < 1500 cd/m

Maintenance factor (MF)

Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance WF = 0.80 4000 h 2 years 2 years

100

120

140

The following generally applies: IPX5: for cleaning using water jets

Beer or wine cellars IP44 Shower cubicles IP44 Stores, storerooms for hay, straw, feedstuff IP44 Intensive stock farming IP44 Animal sheds IP44 Adjoining rooms of animal sheds IP44 Facilities with increased fire risk Workrooms Woodworking Sawmills Paper processing Textile processing Treatment and fabrication Gymnasia and sports halls
The Lighting Handbook

The following generally applies: IPX5: for cleaning using water jets IP54+FF: when increased fire risk

IP50 IP50 IP50 IP50 IP50 IP50 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
ballproof luminaires ballproof luminaires with all-round cover; maximum mesh size 60 mm

Badminton courts Squash courts Indoor tennis courts Gymnasia and sports halls

Chapter 7 / 5

Fire protection
Luminaire identification marking The following criteria must be taken into account: position of normal use fire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces minimum clearance from combustible substances and materials Luminaires with thecmark Luminaires which carry thecmark must be constructed so that the temperature on the mounting surface does not exceed 130 C during abnormal operation, and does not exceed 180 C in the event of a ballast fault. Luminaires with this mark are suitable for direct mounting on parts of buildings made of non-combustible, flame-retardant or normally flammable building materials according to DIN 4102. /Umark Luminaires with the Both marks regulate the surface temperatures of luminaires. External surfaces on which readily flammable substances such as dust or fibrous materials may accumulate when luminaires are installed as prescribed must not exceed specific temperatures. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999. A validity transition period allows the d mark to be used until 01. 08. 2005. TheUmark introduced in EN 60598 has applied since 01.08.1998. The d mark limits the temperature on horizontal surfaces to 95 C during normal operation and 115 C in the event of a ballast fault. Temperatures must not exceed 220 C on vertical surfaces. In order to fulfil the criteria of the Umark, the surface temperature on horizontal surfaces must not exceed 90 C. The maximum temperature in the event of a fault is 115 C, the same as for the d mark. The temperature must not exceed 150 C on vertical surfaces. Luminaires with theQmark Luminaires which carry theQmark are intended for installation in furniture. They are designed so that in the event of a ballast fault, flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as specified in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited, e.g. in corners of wooden furniture. The materials may be painted, veneered or varnished. mark Luminaires with the Luminaires which carry the q mark are intended for mounting in or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is not known. They are designed so that in normal operation any mounting surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do not exceed a temperature of 95 C. 6 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Fire protection: Place of use Mark Requirements

Place of use Luminaire mark Requirements for luminaires with discharge lamps as specified in EN 60598-1

Building parts made of non-combustible building materials according to DIN 4102 Part 1 Building parts made of flame-retardant building materials according to DIN 4102 Part 1 Facilities with increased fire risk according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 720

c U d
IP5X

as specified in EN 60598-1 on the mounting surface:

Mounting surface < 130 C < 180 C Operation abnormal ballast fault

as specified in EN 60598-2-24 luminaire surfaces

horiz. vertical Operation < 90 C < 150 C normal < 115 C < 150 C abnormal/ ballast fault

Agricultural facilities with increased fire risk according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 720 IP54 DIN VDE 0100 Part 705 Installation VDS 8/83 Form 2033 marking Installation objects whose fire behaviour is specified as flame retardant or normally flammable in DIN 4102 Part 1 Installation objects with unknown fire behaviour
The Lighting Handbook

U d

as specified in EN 60598-2-24 luminaire surfaces

horiz. vertical Operation < 90 C < 150 C normal < 115 C < 150 C abnormal/ ballast fault

Q
Permissive location markings

as per DIN VDE 0710 Part 14 on the mounting surface and adjacent surfaces
Mounting surface < 130 C < 180 C Operation abnormal ballast fault

q
Permissive location markings

as per DIN VDE 0710 Part 14 on the mounting surface and adjacent surfaces
Mounting surface < 95 C < 130 C < 130 C Operation normal abnormal ballast fault

Chapter 7 / 7

Explosion-proofness
Flammable gases, vapours and mists Zone O A hazardous explosive atmosphere is present continuously or long term. Zone 1 A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur occasionally. Zone 2 A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur only rarely and, if any, short term. Combustible dusts Zone 20 includes areas in which there is a permanent, longterm or frequent explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures. Zone 21 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures can be expected to occur occasionally and short term. Zone 22 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere cannot be expected to occur due to disturbance of deposited dust. If an explosive atmosphere should nevertheless occur, this will most probably happen only rarely and short term. Directive 94/9/EG The new Directive 94/9/EC specifies the requirements for all devices and protection systems for use in explosion-prone areas. Over and above this, this Directive now directly includes the basic safety requirements for explosion-proof equipment. Manufacturers of explosion-proof equipment have to provide evidence of a quality assurance system to be tested by a notified body. Directive 99/92 EG (Workplace Directive) Also new is the description of hazard areas in explosion-prone workplaces, and a resulting graded safety profile for the equipment used. As this Directive was drafted according to the ECs new approach, the manufacturers declaration of conformity, combined with CE marking of the products, was introduced for explosion-proof equipment as well. A detailed commentary

8 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

on Directive 94/9/EC is included in the Directive 94/9/EC by the European Parliament and the Council of 23 March 1994 section. Since 1 July 2003, it has superseded all directives on explosion protection previously effective at European level. Please note: The previous standard on construction and testing of explosion-proof equipment for Zone 2 has been superseded by ILC 60079-15/EN 60079-15, which specifies higher requirements for Zone 2 luminaires (higher requirements in terms of electronic ballasts and impact resistance).

Equipment of Group 2 including potential ignition source

Equipment cat. 1 Equipment cat. 2 Equipment cat. 3

Yes

Electrical appliance

No Engine with internal combustion

EC type examination

Documentation of notified body

Documentation of manufacturer

Internal production control

Basic safety and health requirements Classification of max. surface temperatures in electrical equipment of Class 2
Temperature class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Max. permissible surface temperature of equipment in C 450 300 200 135 100 85 Ignition temperatures of flammable substances in C > 450 > 300 450 > 300 200 > 200 135 > 100 135 > 85 100

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 9

Requirements concerning safety ball-proofness

Luminaires for sports halls must be ball-proof according to DIN VDE 0710-13. Balls hitting luminaires must not damage them so as to cause luminaire parts to fall down. In a test conforming with the relevant standard, the luminaire has to withstand 36 hits from three directions at a maximum impact speed of 60 km/h, the ball used having the size of a handball. When choosing the luminaires, the rod guards grid width must be matched to the sport played in the hall: it must always be considerably smaller than the balls used, never of the same size, as balls may get stuck in the guard. As ball-proof luminaires, the Zumtobel range includes the RAS/RES-BWS louvre luminaire as well as the VALUEA and COPA-A/COPA-I high-bay luminaire.

10 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Clean-room technology
Clean-room compatibility tested CLEAN Advanced and CLEAN Supreme have been tested and assessed by the Fraunhofer Institute in Stuttgart (Germany) with respect to clean-room compatibility for clean-rooms (particle emission behaviour of the luminaires) and cleanliness compatibility (disinfectability, electrostatic behaviour and chemical resistance).

Details on clean-room compatibility The German VDI 2083 Guideline specifies a standardised procedure for all equipment used in a clean-room. The common criterion for the clean-room compatibility of luminaires and all other equipment is their particle emission behaviour. Airborne particle emission is used as a classification criterion in all international standards. The relevant maximum value for the permissible concentration of particles of a specific particle size constitutes the class limit. Test setup A defined volume of air is aspirated by an air sampling probe and fed into a test chamber. The particles inside this test chamber are monitored and recorded appropriately. Exceeding the relevant limit values is decisive in order to classify the luminaires. If a limit value is not exceeded with a certainty of at least 95 %, the respective item of equipment may be regarded as suitable for use in this air cleanliness class.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 11

Details on cleanliness compatibility In order to be able to confirm cleanliness compatibility as well as quantities reflecting clean-room compatibility that can be detected by metrological methods, additional expert assessments and parameters were included in the tests conducted by the Fraunhofer Institute IPA. Cleanliness compatibility covers a large number of sector-based cleanliness requirements such as resistance to chemicals, surface quality, flow behaviour or electrostatic charge characteristics. These are defined in the following standards and codes of practice, among others: Standardisation General: classification of air cleanliness clean-rooms and associated controlled environments according to DIN EN ISO 14644-1 (Federal Standard 209 has been withdrawn) clean-room technology and clean-room compatibility of equipment VDI 2083 EHEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group) Industrial application areas: GMP Guidelines (Good Manufacturing Practice) pharmaceuticals FDA (Food and Drug Administration) pharmaceuticals and foodstuffs Medicinal Product Law EU Pharmaceutical Regulation Good manufacturing practices Volume 4 (Medicinal products for human and veterinary use) Hazard Analytical Control Point (HACCP) Regulations foodstuffs Hospital application areas: VDI 2167 Building services in hospitals DIN 1946-4 Ventilation and air conditioning Part 4 (Ventilation in hospitals)

12 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Airflow systems in clean-rooms One of the basic criteria for the requirements placed on equipment in clean-rooms is the nature of the airflow system. The CLEAN clean-room luminaire has been designed for use in all clean-room classes with a turbulent mixed airflow. In this commonly encountered airflow system, air enters the room with a turbulent flow, thereby causing continuous dilution and cleaning. According to GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice) classification, clean-room Classes C to E and ISO Classes 6 to 9 can be achieved using this airflow system. Clean-rooms with low-turbulence displacement flow, which are more expensive to build, allow air to initially enter the cleanroom with low turbulence. The design of laminar flow cleanrooms precludes the use of any luminaires other than extremely slim batten luminaires which disrupt the directional flow of air as little as possible. The laminar flow system minimises contamination, and any contaminant is quickly eliminated. Cleanrooms in ISO Classes 1 to 6 and GMP Classes A and B are areas where this airflow system is used.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 13

Chemical effects on materials

No material is resistant to all chemical influences. The effects of chemicals vary widely and take up entire volumes of resistance tables. The table on the opposite page can therefore only give a brief overview of effects of some frequently occurring chemicals and is subject to the following conditions: The chemical substance listed in the table is a basic material and not part of a chemical compound. the ambient temperature is 22 C A great many complaints could be avoided if due consideration were given during the planning stage to the situation in which the luminaire is going to be used. What are the key factors? 1. Luminaire materials A luminaire consists of several parts having different functions and which are therefore made from different materials (base plate, cover, seal, closures, cable inlets, etc.). 2. Applications The following applications are just a few examples of situations in which material damage may occur: chemical and petrochemical industry foodstuffs industry (cheese production, dairies, meat processing, breweries) agriculture fishing industry kitchens and industrial cooking facilities car wash facilities production facilities and workshops using a high level of oil and grease 3. Chemical composition The chemical composition should be discussed with every operator. 4. Degree of saturation of chemical substances 5. Ambient temperature Depending on the type and composition of the substances, chemical reactions will take place over a range of temperatures. We should be glad to provide further advice if you have any questions or doubts about the resistance of any materials.
The Lighting Handbook

14 / Chapter 7

Chemical substance in question

Stainless Alusteel minium

Poly- Polymeth- Polyester acrylate..carbonate

The Lighting Handbook

Acetic acid up to 5 % Acetic acid up to 30 % Acetone Alcohol up to 30 % Alcohol, concentrated Aliphatic hydrocarbons Ammonia 25 % Aniline Aromatic hydrocarbons Battery acid Beer Benzene Blood Bromic acid Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Carbon tetrachloride Caustic soda solution 2 % Caustic soda solution 10 % Chloroform Chlorophenol Diesel oil, crude oil Dioxan Ether Ethyl acetate (ester) Glycerine Glycol Glysantin Hydrochloric acid up to 20 % above 20 % Hydrogen peroxide up to 40 % over 40 %

= resistant = resistant to limited extent = not resistant

Chapter 7 / 15

Chemical substance in question

Stainless Alusteel minium

Poly- Polymeth- Polyester acrylate..carbonate

Ketones Lime milk Lysol Methylene chloride Methanol Metal salts and their aqueous solutions Naphtha (cleaners naphtha) Petrolium ether Pyridine Phenol Nitric acid up to 10 % up to 20 % above 20 % Sea water Soap-suds Soda Sodium chloride solution Sulphuretted hydrogen Sulphuric acid up to 50 % up to 70 % above 70 % Sulphurous acid up to 5 % Synthetic detergents Turpentine Water up to 60 C Xylene

= resistant = resistant to limited extent = not resistant

Electronic ballasts for TC-L fluorescent lamps, non-dimmable (TRIDONIC PC TCL PRO series)
C10 1.5 mm2 30 24 30 24 38 24 38 14 28 8 C13 1.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 54 34 54 24 38 14 C16 1.5 mm2 48 38 48 38 76 44 78 28 50 18 C20 2.5 mm2 60 46 60 46 90 50 90 34 60 20 B10 1.5 mm2 15 12 15 12 19 12 19 7 14 4 B13 1.5 mm2 20 16 20 16 27 17 27 12 19 7 B16 1.5 mm2 24 19 24 19 38 22 39 14 25 9 B20 2.5 mm2 30 23 30 23 45 25 45 17 30 10

1/18 W 2/18 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W

TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L

Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps, Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC PCA TCL ECO/EXCEL one4all series)
C10 1.5 mm2 10 16 30 10 30 10 20 10 10 C13 1.5 mm2 12 20 50 20 50 20 30 14 20 C16 1.5 mm2 16 24 70 30 70 30 40 18 30 C20 2.5 mm2 20 30 76 30 76 30 46 20 30 B10 1.5 mm2 5 8 15 5 15 5 10 5 5 B13 1.5 mm2 6 10 25 10 25 10 15 7 10 B16 1.5 mm2 8 12 35 15 35 15 20 9 15 B20 2.5 mm2 10 15 38 15 38 15 23 10 15

2/18 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W 1/80 W

TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L

20 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL fluorescent lamps, nondimmable (TRIDONIC PC PRO series)
C10 1.5 mm 2 48 32 46 32 48 32 46 32 48 48 34 22 34 22/14 34 14 C13 1.5 mm2 72 44 70 44 72 44 70 44 72 72 46 32 46 32/18 46 18 C16 1.5 mm2 80 54 78 52 80 54 78 52 80 80 74 38 74 38/22 74 22 C20 B10 2.5 1.5 mm2 mm2 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 100 24 84 17 44 11 84 17 44/30 11/7 84 17 30 7 B13 B16 B20 1.5 1.5 2.5 mm2 mm2 mm2 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 36 40 50 23 37 42 16 19 22 23 37 42 16/9 19/11 22/15 23 37 42 9 11 15

1/9 W TC-SEL 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/10 W TC-DEL 2/10 W TC-DEL 1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL

Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescent lamps, Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC PCA TCD/TCT ECO/EXCEL one4all series)
C10 C13 1.5 1.5 mm 2 mm2 40 60 28 40 40 60 28 40 30 50 22 32 30 50 22 32 26 38 10 18 26 38 12 18 12 16 C16 C20 1.5 2.5 mm2 mm2 80 80 60 64 80 80 60 64 70 76 46 68 70 76 46 56 50 58 24 28 50 58 24 28 22 26 B10 1.5 mm2 20 14 20 14 15 11 15 11 13 5 13 6 6 B13 1.5 mm2 30 20 30 20 25 15 25 16 19 9 19 9 8 B16 1.5 mm2 40 30 40 30 35 23 35 23 25 12 25 12 11 B20 2.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 38 34 38 28 29 14 29 14 13

1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL 2/13 W TC-DEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/57 W TC-TEL The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 21

Loading of automatic circuit breakers for high-pressure lamps Maximum recommended number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps, uncompensated
Lamp W 35 70 150 250 400 400 values A 0.53 0.98 1.8 3 3.5* 4.4** Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 11 18 23 29 9 15 18 23 7 11 14 17 5 8 9 12 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2

* with OGLI 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.5 A ** with OGLS 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 4.4 A

Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps, uncompensated

Lamp W 50 70 100 150 250 400 values A 0.77 1 1.2 1.8 3 4.4 Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 9 14 18 22 6 10 13 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 6 9 11 14 4 6 8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 B25 16 12 10 7 4 2

Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps, uncompensated

Lamp W 50 80 125 250 400 700 values A 0.6 0.8 1.15 2.15 3.25 5.4 Number of ballasts per automatic C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 10 15 18 23 8 6 9 11 14 6 4 7 7 9 4 2 3 3 4 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 circuit breaker B16 B20 B25 13 16 20 10 12 15 7 9 10 3 4 5 2 3 3 1 1 1

22 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps, compensated

Lamp values W A 35 0.53 70 0.98 150 1.8 250 3 400 3.5* 400 4.4** ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 6 22 36 45 50 11 18 23 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 32 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 35 3 5 7 8 2 4 5 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4

B25 27 20 12 8 6 5

* with OGLI 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.5 A ** with OGLS 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 4.4 A

Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps, compensated

Lamp values W A 50 0.77 70 1 100 1.2 150 1.8 250 3 400 4.4 ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 10 16 24 31 38 11 17 22 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 12 10 16 20 25 7 11 14 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 36 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4

B25 27 20 17 12 8 5

Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps, compensated

Lamp values W A 50 0.6 80 0.8 125 1.15 250 2.15 400 3.25 700 5.4 ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 7 19 31 39 49 10 15 18 23 8 12 19 24 30 6 9 11 14 10 7 12 15 19 4 6 7 9 18 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 4 25 2 4 5 6 1 2 2 2 40 1 2 2 3 1 1 1

All data refer to a rated voltage of 230 V 50 Hz.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 23

Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps Maximum recommended number of transformers per automatic circuit breaker Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC TMBx/OMTx series)
Power 20 W 35 W 50 W 70 W 80 W 105 W 150 W 210 W 300 W C10 58 41 21 15 14 8 4 23 12 C16 93 65 35 24 22 13 6 45 23 B10 29 20 10 7 7 4 2 1 n.r. B16 46 32 17 12 11 6 3 2 1

n.r. = not recommended

Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC TMAx/TMDx series)
Power 20 W 35 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 105 W C10 42 35 26 23 21 16 13 9 C16 67 56 43 37 33 26 21 14 B10 21 17 13 11 10 8 6 4 B16 33 28 21 18 16 13 10 7

Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC OGT series)
Power 250 W 300 W 500 W C10 34 2 1 C16 56 34 12 B10 12 1 n.r. B16 23 12 n.r.

n.r. = not recommended

Because of the high starting current of halogen incandescent lamps, we recommend to use automatic circuit breakers with C characteristics.

24 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Low-voltage installation
Service life and luminous flux The service life and luminous flux of low-voltage halogen lamps are extremely voltage dependent. Voltage changes on the line side are transferred to the secondary side in the same ratio.
50

Multiplication factor for relative operating values

30 20 10 8 6 4 2

1=
100% 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.15 60 % 80 % 100 % 120 %

A 1 V overvoltage is insignificant for a 230 W halogen 4 lamp. For a 12 V halogen lamp, 3 however, this represents an 2 overvoltage of 8 % which re1 = duces the average 100 % service life of the 0.8 0.6 halogen lamp, e.g. 0.4 from 3,000 hours 0.3 to approx. 1,200 0.2 hours.
7 6 5 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02

Lh
140 %

= luminous flux Lh = service life

Voltage as % of nominal voltage

Operation at rated load Magnetic transformers should be operated at rated load as far as possible so as to avoid any rise in the secondary voltage which can result in a reduction in lamp service life (5 % overvoltage corresponds to 30 % shorter life). Conductor cross-sections and voltage drop Because the voltages are small, large currents flow on the secondary side. If conductors are long and have small crosssections, this can result in considerable voltage drops. Crosssections must be chosen so that the voltage drop across the conductor between transformer and lamp does not exceed 5 %.
The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 25

Required conductor cross-sections in mm2 as a function of transformer rating and cable length (one-way line length) for magnetic transformers:
Transformer rating Cable length in m

20 VA 50 VA 100 VA 150 VA 200 VA

up to 2 m up to 4 m 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 4

up to 6 m 1.5 1.5 4 6 6

up to 8 m 1.5 2.5 4 6 10

up to 10 m up to 12 m 1.5 1.5 2.5 4 6 6 10 10 10 16

Installation The distance between transformer and lamps must be as short as possible (minimum distance, however, is approx. 30 cm) in order to avoid the relatively large conductor cross-sections. On the other hand, there is often unwanted humming, especially when lighting is adjusted; therefore the transformer must be installed out of earshot if possible.

Transformer

Wherever possible, cables must be laid in a star configuration and be of equal length to ensure that all lamps receive the same voltage.

26 / Chapter 7

The Lighting Handbook

Transformers and light regulation Only approved safety transformers should be used. The ambient temperature must not exceed 50 C max. Please note that transformers for use in areas which present fire risks must carry the appropriate conformity mark (e.g. , , , ). Phase control Halogen lamps are operated with a magnetic transformer. Reverse phase control Halogen lamps are operated with an electronic transformer in the high-frequency range. Important: do not exceed maximum conductor length. Safety measures when operating low-voltage halogen lamps Low-voltage halogen lamps generate a huge amount of heat. In the case of recessed luminaires, make sure there is adequate heat removal and that the safety distances from combustible materials are observed. The necessary safety distances from the illuminated surface also apply when using spotlights. These are identified by the following symbol and details of the relevant distance in metres:

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 7 / 27

Chapter 8

Checklists
The five steps of lighting design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) . . . . . . Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) . . . Economic efficiency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of burning hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refurbishment of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment . . . . . Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 11 4 11 12 19 13 14 17 18 19 20 23 21 22 23 24 28 27 28 29 33

The five steps of lighting design = help for structuring the lighting design scheme Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS SELECT lamps, luminaires and lighting management Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required POSITION luminaires and lighting control ANALYSE the results
From experience we know that usually Step 1 = Determine lighting requirements is not taken into account sufficiently. The checklist below should help the user to consider key questions for clarifying basic requirements. Accordingly, requirements are broken down as follows: general conditions lighting quality requirements visual performance vista visual comfort vitality empowerment The lighting quality criteria are in line with those set by the EU. ELI (Ergonomic Lighting Indicator) was developed in collaboration with ETH Zurich and TU Ilmenau (Prof. Dr. Schierz). Understanding this task will allow for proper development of a well thought-out lighting solution based on the quality characteristics of lighting (Chapter 1) and project-specific requirements. Analysis includes the assessment of lighting quality. In the process, the requirement criteria are taken into account. The formulations for assessment differ from the requirements (ELI assessment).
The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 8 / 3

Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design

1. Lighting requirements General conditions Utilization of room Size and height of room Ceiling structure Reflection factors Window areas Doors, passageways, circulation areas Multi-task areas Arrangement and material of furniture Protection types (foreign bodies and humidity) Protection classes (electrical installations) Influence by chemicals Fire protection Emergency lighting Energy consumption limits (kWh/year) Maximum power requirement (W/m) Budget for initial installation Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements) Criterion A Visual performance
How well should the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.

Checked

At the workstations, ... standard visual tasks have to be performed. ... visual tasks are the same across the whole area. ... colour distinction is required to a common extent. ... no extraordinary changes of viewing direction occur. 4 / Chapter 8
-2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

The Lighting Handbook

Within the visual task area, ... hard shadows must be avoided. ... the field of vision should be free from sources of glare. ... reflections must be avoided.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task

Criterion B Vista
How do you want to experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.

In the project planned, ... ... the lighting concept should blend in smoothly with the interior design. ... the lighting concept should be properly geared towards expectations. ... the lighting concept should facilitate orientation in the room. In the project planned, ... ... the first visual impression will be decisive. ... the perceptible quality of the luminaire will be of major importance. ... the cleanliness of the room and the lighting will be of major importance.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vista

Criterion C Visual comfort

How much visual comfort is required in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance.

In the project planned, ... ... users must be particularly protected from annoying sources of glare.
The Lighting Handbook
-2 -1 0 * 1 2

... it will be particularly important to identify three-dimensional structures in the room. ... the room should provide a bright and inviting impression.

-2 -1 0 1 2

Chapter 8 / 5

... daylight must be taken into account. ... there must be no flickering light. ... larger dark areas should be avoided. In the area around the visual task, the room should be illuminated uniformly.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards

-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

Mean value Visual comfort

Criterion D Vitality
How positive should the lights influence be on people? Explanation: Light significantly influences peoples activity and sense of well-being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.

The lighting concept ... should make people feel good. ... should stimulate people. In the project planned, ... ... it should be possible in particular to adjust the lighting to the brightness level required. ... the effect to be created should be as natural as possible. ... peoples circadian rhythm should be particularly taken into account. In the project planned, special emphasis is put on protection against sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vitality

Criterion E Empowerment
To what extent should the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence ones lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.

In the project planned, ... ... the user should be able to personally influence the lighting situation. ... a variety of tasks must be taken into account. The lighting should be switched automatically. The artificial lighting should be controlled by daylight sensors. 6 / Chapter 8
1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

The Lighting Handbook

1 2 3 4 5

The lighting should be controlled on the basis of time. Any future layout changes should be taken into account.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Empowerment

ELI LENI requirements

Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart.

Visual performance

1 0 5

E
Empowerment

-1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3

5B Vista

3 4 5

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

ELI

120

0
kWh/m2 a

180

LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 8 / 7

2. Selection of lamps, luminaires and lighting management Lamp type Luminaire range and model Lighting management range and modules 3. Calculate number of luminaires required Rough calculation (Quickplan/Quickcalc) Detailed calculation (Dialux/Relux) Planning conditions (maintenance, reflection) 4. Positioning of luminaires and lighting control Positioning the luminaires structural situation orientation (avoid reflections and glare) spacings between luminaires (regular patterns) peripheries alignment techn. infrastructure (distribution cabinet, clamping compartment, ) Position of control gear Emergency lighting 5. Analysis of results Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment) Criterion A Visual performance
How well can the visual task be recognised?

Checked

Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.

In the main visual task area, the lighting ... provides uniformity of illuminance. ... complies with the colour rendition index. 8 / Chapter 8
-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

The Lighting Handbook

... complies with the maintenance value of illuminance.

-2 -1 0 * 1 2

In the area around the visual task, the illuminance level required is achieved. In the lighting installation as it exists at present, ... annoying hard shadows, ... irritating direct glare ... and annoying reflections are avoided.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards

-2 -1 0 1 2

-2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task

Please note: EN 12464 specifies standard values; values may be lower only if visual tasks are modified. Where there are several task areas, calculate and assess the mean value for all of them.

Criterion B Vista
How do you experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room.

The lighting concept ... enhances interior design features. ... fulfils my personal expectations. ... takes passageways, circulation areas and activity zones into consideration. ... creates a hierarchy of perception (lighting focuses). The luminaires make a high-quality impression. The luminaires are neither soiled nor affected by other foreign substances.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vista

Criterion C Visual comfort

How much visual comfort is provided in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. -2 -1 0 * 1 2

The lighting solution produces no glare (UGR).

The Lighting Handbook

The lighting components are balanced and matched to the room. The ceiling and walls are pleasantly bright.

-2 -1 0 1 2

Chapter 8 / 9

The lighting solution ... takes daylight into account and uses it. ... does not flicker. ... does not allow major dark areas in the room. The task area environment is uniformly illuminated.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2

Mean value Visual comfort

Criterion D Vitality
How positive is the lights influence on the people? Explanation: Light significantly influences peoples activity and sense of well-being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.

The lighting ... is one of the factors that make me feel good. ... has a stimulating effect. ... adjusts to the brightness level required. The lighting creates a natural, pleasant effect. The lighting stabilises/enhances the users circadian rhythm. There are no sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Vitality

Criterion E Empowerment
To what extent does the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence ones lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. 1 2 3 4 5

The installation can be switched or dimmed. A variety of lighting scenes can be called up.

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Presence detectors make sure that the lighting switches automatically. Thanks to daylight sensors, the artificial lighting adjusts to daylight changes over the course of the day. Automated, dynamic scenes are available. 10 / Chapter 8

1 2 3 4 5

The Lighting Handbook

Luminaires and switches can be rearranged flexibly. The luminaires are arranged so as to allow for flexible change in room utilisation without major effort.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Mean value Empowerment

ELI LENI assessments

Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart.
Visual performance

1 0 5

E
Empowerment

-1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3

5B Vista

3 4 5

D
Vitality

C
Visual comfort

ELI 60 120

0
kWh/m2 a

180

LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19 Other analyses Situation regarding standards Economic efficiency
The Lighting Handbook

Budget Documentation Methods of presentation Chapter 8 / 11

Maintenance of lighting systems

Today, the maintenance of lighting installations is a decisive factor in an installations balance of costs. According to the formula below (1), a lighting level required of Em = 500 lx at a standard maintenance factor of MF = 0.67 implies a new illuminance level of Enew = 750 lx. Em: maintained illuminance = maintenance value of illuminance (1) Em = Enew x MF (maintenance factor) Benefit of a high MF: lower luminaire investment costs reduced energy costs Benefit of a low MF: low maintenance costs longer maintenance intervals

Please note: at a lower maintenance factor, illuminance may be constantly dimmed to the maintenance value to save energy (maintenance control). The maintenance factor includes 4 components: (2) MF = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RMF All these factors describe the decrease in illuminance. The maximum in each case is 1, corresponding to the new value. At the respective time of maintenance, the various causes of the decrease in illuminance must be identified.
Maintenance factor components Causes of illuminance decrease

Lamp luminous flux mainten. factor LLMF Lamp survival factor LSF Luminaire maintenance factor LMF Room maintenance factor RMF

Ageing of lamps Failure of lamps Soiling of luminaire Soiling of room

12 / Chapter 8

The Lighting Handbook

Options for improving the maintenance factor: lamp replacement already before the lamp service life ends (LLMF/LSF ) immediate replacement of lamps in case of failure (LSF = 1) use of closed luminaires (LWF7 ) more frequent room cleaning (RWF7 )

160 % 140 % 120 % 100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 % 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 years 2.5 3.0

Example: Luminaire maintenance: every year Room surface maintenance: every 3 years Lamp replacement: every 3 years Faulty lamp replacement: immediately

= E new = Em 3.5

Environmental conditions
In case you are not familiar with the application, the following standard values apply; however, the tables below will help you calculate the accurate maintenance factor according to formula (2).
Ambient condition Very Clean (SS) Maintenance Working interval areas recommended 3 years Clean-rooms, data centres, assembly workstations for electronic components 3 years 2 years Offices, schools Shops, laboratories, restaurants, warehouses, assembly bays Steel works, chemical plants, foundries, welding shops, grinding shops, wood processing Reference maintenance factor 0.80

Clean (S) Normal (N)

0.67 0.57

Soiled (V)

1 year

0.50

The Lighting Handbook

According to CIE volume 97, Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, at 2005

Chapter 8 / 13

Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF)

14 / Chapter 8

Lamps

Incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 Halogen incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) single-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005/CIE97:2005 T26 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life Philips MASTER TL-D Xtreme (long life) T26 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life AURA Ultimate LL (long life) T16 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T16 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life AURA SUPREME T5 HO LL (long life)

LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF

Burning hours 100 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 1.00 0.97 0.93 1.00 0.98 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.97 0.95 1.00 1.00 0.78 0.50 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.72 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.78 0.60 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.83 0.60 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.90 0.75 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.70 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.80 0.50 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98

The Lighting Handbook

and lamp survival factor (LSF)

Compact fluorescent lamp CIE97:2005 TC-S, TC-D, TC-T 5-26W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-SEL, TC-TEL 5-42W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-DEL 10-26W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-36W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-80W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 Induction lamp Philips QL

LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF

1.00 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.85 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.86 0.50 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.81 0.60 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.93 0.87 0.84 0.82 0.80 0.79 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.93 0.76 0.55 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.78 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.80 0.60 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.95 0.86 0.62 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.90 0.75 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94

Chapter 8 / 15

Values acc. to specications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005 Technical report Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems 2nd edition, and ZVEI publication Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major inuence on lamp survival. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).

Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF)

16 / Chapter 8

Lamps

Metal halide lamp Ceramic (50-150W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Ceramic Philips CDM-T 70W/Elite Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI-T 150W/WDL PB Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI 250W PB Metal halide lamp Quartz (250/400W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 250W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 400W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-BT 400W/N Metal halide lamp Quartz Philips HPI-T Plus 250/400W

LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF

Burning hours 100 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 1.00 0.95 0.87 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.64 0.60 0.56 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.95 0.80 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.85 0.81 0.80 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.50 1.00 0.93 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.80 0.77 0.73 0.71 0.69 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.88 0.70 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.87 0.84 0.81 0.80 0.75 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.85 0.75 0.62 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.56 0.53 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.92 0.86 0.80 0.73 0.68 0.63 0.55 0.50 0.99 0.98 0.92 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0.69 0.65 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61 1.00 0.97 0.93 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.78 0.74 0.71 0.69 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61 1.00 0.97 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.70 0.69 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.71 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.75 0.66 0.59 0.50

The Lighting Handbook

LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF

1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.75 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94 0.91 0.84 0.77 0.63 0.50 1.00 0.98 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.70 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.72 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.86 0.85 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.72 0.63 0.50 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87

and lamp survival factor (LSF)

High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 501,000W ZVEI 2005 Mercury vapour lamp Philips HPL-N 50-400W Sodium vapour lamp 50/70W ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150400W (standard luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150400W (higher luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp Philips SON(-T) PIA Plus 100-400W

LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.79 0.70 LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90

LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.81 0.73 LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.89 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.88 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.55 0.43

Chapter 8 / 17

Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)

18 / Chapter 8
V SS S 2.0 N V SS V 2.5 V SS S N 3.0 S N

Luminaire cleaning interval in years Environment type Luminaire type Bare batten luminaires

0.5 SS S N

V SS

1.0 S N

V SS

1.5 S N

0.98 0.95 0.92 0.88 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.80 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.78 0.93 0.87 0.82 0.75 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.73

Reflector exposed above (self-cleaning effect)

0.96 0.95 0.91 0.88 0.95 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.94 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.92 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.91 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.89 0.79 0.74 0.68

Reflector enclosed above (no self-cleaning effect)

0.95 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.94 0.89 0.81 0.72 0.93 0.84 0.74 0.64 0.91 0.80 0.69 0.59 0.89 0.77 0.64 0.54 0.87 0.74 0.61 0.52

Enclosed IP2X

0.94 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.93 0.85 0.79 0.73 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.90 0.81 0.75 0.68 0.89 0.79 0.73 0.65

Dust-proof IP5X

0.94 0.96 0.93 0.91 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.92 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.93 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.92 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.92 0.90 0.84 0.79

0.94 0.92 0.89 0.85 0.93 0.86 0.81 0.74 0.91 0.81 0.73 0.65 0.77 0.88 0.66 0.57 0.86 0.73 0.60 0.51 0.85 0.70 0.55 0.45 Indirect luminaires From CIE publication 97 Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, dated 2005, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber), S = clean (sauber), N = normal, V = soiled (verschmutzt)

The Lighting Handbook

5.0

5.5

6.0

Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)

Room cleaninginterval in years 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 Illumina- Environment tion type type Direct SS 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 S 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 N 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 V 1.00 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 Direct/ SS 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 Indirect S 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 N 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 V 1.00 0.77 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 Indirect SS 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 S 1.00 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 N 1.00 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 V 1.00 0.60 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 From CIE publication 97 Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, dated 2005, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 The figures in the table above apply to reflection factors 70/50/20 and a medium-sized room (k = 2.5) Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber), S = clean (sauber), N = normal, V = soiled (verschmutzt) 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.55

Chapter 8 / 19

Economic efficiency calculation

A short pay-back period is usually the most important consideration when designing lighting systems. The pay-back period calculation using the following forms is based on a static calculation method. This is a theoretical approach that delivers a guide value very quickly and is perfectly adequate for an initial estimate. Dynamic calculation models involving depreciation and interest payments are left to the financial experts and fall outside the scope of this handbook. Static calculation model Pay-back time = Extra expenditure investment costs Annual saving in operating costs

20 / Chapter 8

The Lighting Handbook

Definition of terms used in the economic analysis sheets (3) System power of luminaire: Lamp wattage + power dissipation in control gear (5) Annual burning hours: Total of the daily lamp ON hours over the year. The table of burning hours (Chap. 8/23) provides help for daylight-based systems. (9) Maintenance factor: A reference maintenance factor of 0.67 can be assumed (3-year maintenance interval, clean environment), e.g. office; see Chap. 8/12). The maintenance value can be determined precisely on the basis of the details included in the previous chapter Maintenance of lighting installations. The lighting calculation cannot be made until the maintenance factor has been determined. The maintenance factor plus the general conditions have to be documented in the design process. (14) Cost of lamp replacement: Cost of the complete job of replacing the lamps, including the costs of the lamp and additional costs such as step ladders, weekend overtime payments or loss of production. (15) Cost of luminaire cleaning: Cost of the complete job of cleaning the luminaire plus replacing faulty components in the lighting system including parts costs. (16) Cost of room cleaning: Labour costs for cleaning room surfaces and restoring the reflection characteristics to their new condition. (17) Energy costs per kWh: Estimate a mixed price for high and low tariff. Include energy standing charges in the working price.

Economic analysis
Building project

Option 1 Luminaire type Luminaire data Number of lamps per luminaire System power of luminaire (W) Operating data Service life of system (y) Annual burning hours see Chap. 8/23 Lamp replacement interval (y) Luminaire cleaning interval (y) Room cleaning interval (y) Number of luminaires Maintenance factor Number of luminaires Itemised investment costs Cost of one luminaire Cost of one lamp
The Lighting Handbook
(11) (12) (13) (9) (10) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (2) (3) (1)

Option 2

Installation costs per luminaire

Chapter 8 / 21

Option 1 Itemised operating costs Cost of lamp replacement Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of room cleaning Energy costs per kWh Investment costs Luminaire costs (10) x (11) Lamp costs (10) x (2) x (12) Installation costs (10) x (13) Investment costs (18) + (19) + (20) Operating costs Lamp replacement costs (14) x (4) (6) Luminaire cleaning costs (15) x (4) (7) Room cleaning costs (16) x (4) (8) Energy costs (10) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (17) 1000 Operating costs (22) + (23) + (24) + (25) Annual operating costs (26) (4)
(22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (18) (19) (20) (21) (14) (15) (16) (17)

Option 2

Pay-back period* =

(21) Option 2 (21) Option 1 (27) Option 1 (27) Option 2

years

Pay-back period* =
* excludes depreciation and interest

years
The Lighting Handbook

22 / Chapter 8

The Lighting Handbook

Working mode/shift type Burning hours per lamp and year in hours 8,760 7,300 4,960 3,720 3,100 1,760 2,580 1,550

Daylight-based control

24-h shift working, Process monitoring/control

On period Days in use/year 365 365

Hours/day 24 24

No Yes

Double shift, 6 days/week

310 310

16 16

No Yes

Table of burning hours

Single shift, 6 days/week

310 310

10 10

No Yes

Single shift, 5 days/week

258 258

10 10

No Yes

Daylight-based control: the lamps switch on automatically when there is too little daylight available. Data is based on the assumption that there is sufficient available daylight for half the year.

From CIE publication 97 Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems, dated 2005

Chapter 8 / 23

Refurbishment of lighting systems

The following list provides clues for discussion with the customer. The potentialities stated draw a comparison between contemporary lighting solution options available today with the technology approx. 15 years ago. In a project, viable savings must be accurately calculated in the design stage. The savings apply only on a case-by-case basis. If several measures are taken, they will complement each other without the levels adding up. 1. Saving energy, CO2 and costs Pros 1. Advanced materials Todays reflectors and innovative surface finishes provide for more efficient luminaires. 2. Use of daylight The LUXMATE daylight-based lighting control system provides for high energy savings where sufficient daylight is available. 3. Improvement of lamps and control gear Innovations in the electronic control of lamps, optimised temperatures and improvements of the lamps physical properties provide for extensive savings. 4. Taking ageing into account The balance between the new value and minimum illuminance can be saved by dimmable control (Maintenance Control). 5. Taking room utilisation into account Using presence detectors or a time-based control system, the lighting can be adjusted more properly to the time/s of use. Potential savings up to 30 %

up to 60 %

up to 40 %

up to 17 %

up to 25 %

24 / Chapter 8

The Lighting Handbook

2. Improved ergonomic compatibility Pros 1. Increased productivity According to various studies, peoples productivity can be significantly improved by an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955). 2. Fewer errors According to various studies, peoples error rate can be minimised by an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955). 3. Increased alertness The human physiology is decoded step by step, allowing to perfectly adjust the lighting to the individual (e.g. doctoral thesis by Susanne Fleischer, ETH Zrich). 4. Enhanced sense of well-being Pleasant brightness levels and personal control can have a positive impact on peoples sense of well-being (e.g. Light Right Consortium). Potential savings

Please note: It is difficult to provide exact and generally applicable figures; however, measurable increases were achieved in individual cases. Minor increases already result in high economic benefits.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 8 / 25

3. Improved maintenance conditions (employment of staff for cleaning, maintenance and monitoring) Pros Potential savings up to +50 %

1. Extension of maintenance cycle Over recent years, the service life of lamps has been significantly extended (e.g. Philips Master TL-D Xtreme, AURA Ultimate LL). 2. Reduction in maintenance costs up to 30 % Contemporary luminaires frequently come in a closed design, allowing for easy cleaning (e.g. MELLOW LIGHT IV, LIGHTFIELDS, PERLUCE). 3. Automatic monitoring of installations up to 80 % Today, facility management tools allow for automatic, central monitoring of installations (e.g. in emergency lighting/ONLITE). 4. Energy savings up to 20 % Easy cleaning of luminaires, and extension of the maintenance cycle result in a reduced number of luminaires required, and thus energy savings (e.g. TECTON I IP). 4. Additional pros

Pros 1. Improvements in environmental factors Today, WEEE and RoHS provide the basis for manufacturing luminaires. Environmental impact has been reduced (e.g. lead/cadmium). 2. State of the art The latest lighting solutions reflect the state of the art and an improved situation in terms of lighting standards.

Collecting data for lighting refurbishment

The Lighting Handbook

The following forms are intended to help you collect all relevant data required for evaluating the situation in terms of existing lighting installations. They provide the basis for comparing technical lighting features and for calculating costs.

26 / Chapter 8

Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment

Project Address Activities in room Contact Tel. Fax

Old system Option 1 Luminaire type A

Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance

Option 2

Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance

Total installed load in kW ON period each day (h) Working days per year Annual ON period (h) Power consumption in kWh/a

Annual savings in kWh

Basic power price kW/year
The Lighting Handbook

Power costs per kWh Annual power costs in kWh

Annual savings Chapter 8 / 27

Room length Room width Room height Uniformity Emean = Emin = Room sketch: lx lx

Reflection: wall ceiling floor u = Emin = Emean

% % %

Cleaning per luminaire/year Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)

28 / Chapter 8

The Lighting Handbook

Costs

Old system Option 1

Option 2

The Lighting Handbook

1. Fundamental analysis in luminaires with electronic ballast or dimmable electronic ballast:

Note Checked

Error occurring

Possible cause

Possible solution

Luminaire was recently installed but cannot be switched on. 230 V 10 % Power reset

Faulty circuit-breaker/mains fuse

After checking, perhaps install new circuit-breaker/fuse.

Faulty cable leading to luminaire

Measure voltage at luminaire terminal. Fix wiring at input end.

Ballast power down

Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power, then switch on again.

Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires

With 3~ through-wiring in particular, overvoltages (400 V) may have occurred. N conductor has been confused with L conductor directly earthed conductor interrupted unbalanced load

Visually check electronic ballasts if there are any burn marks at mains input. Replace all units affected.

Chapter 8 / 29

Error occurring Checked Power reset

Possible cause

Possible solution

Note

Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires

30 / Chapter 8

Luminaire worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again.

No re-ignition after lamp replacement

Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power, then switch on again.

Faulty lamp

Check cause: replace lamp/s for working lamp/s from adjacent luminaire. Fit new lamp/s if cause has been confirmed. In multi-lamp luminaires, all lamps have to be replaced (make voltage reset).

Wrong lamp

Check compatibility with ballast. Details on ballast label must conform with details printed on lamp.

Faulty lampholder contact

Check by rotating lamp several times to left and right (approx. 180).

The Lighting Handbook

2. Additional tests for luminaires with dimmable electronic ballast:

Note Power reset with switchdim Checked

Error occurring

Possible cause

Possible solution

Dimmable luminaire already worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again. Power reset with bus signal

Ballast power down in switchdim installations

Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Actuate momentary-action switch at switchdim input (switching on/off).

Ballast power down in LM and/or DALI bus installations

Intermit signal in bus line (B1, B2 or Dali) (disconnect line). Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Then reconnect bus line and try to switch luminaire via control gear installed (LM or Dali).

Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires

Problems with signal line and/or bus line (faulty bus)

Measure power at bus.

Specified values: DALI: 9 to 15 V = LM: 13 to 15 V = DSI: no power measured

Chapter 8 / 31

3. Additional test for HID luminaires (high-pressure lamps such as HIT, HST, etc.):
Note Checked

Error occurring

Possible cause

Possible solution

Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires

32 / Chapter 8

After relamping, luminaire does not work any more.

No contact in lampholder thread

screw-fasten lamp as deeply as possible between lamp solder point and cap tab remove oxidation from lamp solder point, if necessary

The Lighting Handbook

4. Analysis of partial function of luminaires with electronic ballast (bad lighting quality of fluorescent lamp):
Note Checked

Error occurring

Possible cause

Possible solution

Lamp start delayed

No earth connection in luminaires with protection class 1

Connect luminaire earth.

Bad dimming quality

Bad earth connection

Use high-resistance voltmeter to measure power between phase and earth, and between neutral conductor and earth.

Poor luminous efficiency/dimming behaviour

Ambient temperature of lamp too low/too high

Check for heat buildup underneath high Common ceilings or at workplaces with very high temperature range: temperatures. Too low temperatures outside, 15 C < T < 35 C or heavy air flow (e.g. air-conditioning system). Cool Spot

Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires

Cool spot neglected

Do not operate lamps in positions unprovided for.

Chapter 8 / 33

Increasing migration of dark spots along fluorescent lamp

In order to achieve an appropriate lighting quality, new lamps should always be operated at 100 % for the first 100 hours of operation.

Chapter 9

Services
Design process and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 ELI-LENI Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 VIVALDI Composing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ecoCALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Online product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 11 Product data sheets and installation instructions available online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 CAD data in 2D and 3D available online . . . . . . . . . . 11 Online lighting design tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 13 Zumtobel Lighting DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Zumtobel relies on quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Lighting and sustainability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Design process and tools

Design process: Communication Attention to/awareness of concepts and products Determine basic situation; define requirements Blueprint planning Work out a concept Optimise Detailed planning Calculation Documentation Implementation Testing Maintenance

Requirement

Planning

Implementation

Design tools: Communication Product catalogue, brochures, ads and press work, trade fairs, congresses, events, roadshows, Light Forums ELI-LENI calculator Research projects, studies VIVALDI reference Library Online catalogue, QuickCalc, FluxCalc, system configurators, maintenance factor calculation, LM Energy VIVALDI visualisation, DIALux, Relux, ELI-LENI calculator, efficiency analysis, VIVALDI optimising

Requirement

Planning

Under the Download tab, the online catalogue provides a list of all product specifications available for a certain product. Quick access with URL/article reference: www.zumtobel.com/60710147

The Lighting Handbook

Product information available: photometric data sheets inc. UGR tables and maintenance factors data formats Eulumdat, IES CAD data: 2D and 3D Drag & drop data package for DIALux and Relux brochures installation instructions CE certificates

Chapter 9 / 9

Product data sheets and installation instructions available online

Any product information required can be selected from the online catalogue and summarised in the form of a data sheet. Additionally, all installation instructions for the respective product are available in PDF format. complete product information in PDF format, up to date and country-specific: figures, charts, images compilation of the product information selected in the form of a data sheet (ZIP file) photometric data sheets data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products quick dispatch of any part of the catalogue by e-mail

10 / Chapter 9

The Lighting Handbook

CAD data in 2D and 3D available online

The 2D and 3D data for Zumtobel products can be downloaded free of charge in various formats, e.g. dxf, Rhino, Lightscape, 3D Studio Max etc. quick selection of the required symbol 2D luminaire symbols for AutoCAD as library and in DXF format 3D luminaires for various CAD systems special data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products available formats: DXF, Rhino, Lightscape, 3D Studio Max Just take a look at: www.zumtobel.com/download

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 9 / 11

Online lighting design tools

QuickCalc online: QuickCalc provides for a quick, approximate determination of the number of luminaires required to achieve a defined illuminance level according to the light output ratio method or vice versa: to determine the illuminance level of a defined number of luminaires. In the Zumtobel online catalogue, QuickCalc is available under the QuickCalc tab for products with calculation data.

12 / Chapter 9

The Lighting Handbook

FluxCalc online (calculation of luminous flux): Using FluxCalc, the luminous flux of T16 and T26 lamps in relation to ambient temperature can be determined. For T16 lamps, FluxCalc also includes the influence of Zumtobels Cool Spot Optimizer in the calculation.

Zumtobel Lighting DVD

Zumtobel data plug-in for DIALux and Relux with all available product data (Product Explorer with QuickCalc and maintenance factor calculation), updated versions of DIALux and Relux as well as further tools: LUXMATE Energy Light, ZX2 configurator, ELI/LENI calculator and VIVALDI demo version.

The Lighting Handbook

Chapter 9 / 13

Zumtobel relies on quality

Top quality with a five-year guarantee As a globally leading luminaire manufacturer, Zumtobel provides a five-year guarantee for its complete product range YEAR GUARANTEE with effect from 1 April 2010. With this step, Zumtobel lives up to its reputation as a pioneer in terms of innovation, design and quality. The voluntarily extended five-year guarantee comprises Zumtobels entire luminaire portfolio including ballasts or control gear. Only wearing parts such as conventional light sources or emergency lighting batteries are exempt from the guarantee extension. In the case of LED luminaires, the guarantee also extends to the LEDs. Just take a look at: www.zumtobel.com/guarantee

Zumtobel Lighting Handbook
100% (2)
Zumtobel Lighting Handbook
223 pages
Lighting Handbook Philips
100% (2)
Lighting Handbook Philips
223 pages
Mastering Landscape Lighting Design: Part One of Two
100% (2)
Mastering Landscape Lighting Design: Part One of Two
18 pages
Incandescent Light Bulb Diagram
No ratings yet
Incandescent Light Bulb Diagram
15 pages
Ilumart - The Lighting Design Process (Ies, 1994)
No ratings yet
Ilumart - The Lighting Design Process (Ies, 1994)
17 pages
General Lighting Recommendations: Design Guidelines For Energy Efficient Lighting Systems
No ratings yet
General Lighting Recommendations: Design Guidelines For Energy Efficient Lighting Systems
8 pages
Erco Program 2022 en Us
No ratings yet
Erco Program 2022 en Us
194 pages
DLX T1 PDF
No ratings yet
DLX T1 PDF
104 pages
Lighting 1
No ratings yet
Lighting 1
11 pages
Lighting Fixtures - and - Layouts
No ratings yet
Lighting Fixtures - and - Layouts
17 pages
An Introduction To Interior Lighting Design R1
No ratings yet
An Introduction To Interior Lighting Design R1
34 pages
Erco Guide 2 Designing Light en
No ratings yet
Erco Guide 2 Designing Light en
78 pages
LED Luminaire Design Guide
100% (1)
LED Luminaire Design Guide
15 pages
Recommended Illumination Levels by Activity
No ratings yet
Recommended Illumination Levels by Activity
1 page
Facade Guide Low Res
No ratings yet
Facade Guide Low Res
42 pages
Erco Guide en PDF
No ratings yet
Erco Guide en PDF
436 pages
Lighting Design - Whole Building Design Guide
No ratings yet
Lighting Design - Whole Building Design Guide
4 pages
Optimizing Daylight in Architecture
No ratings yet
Optimizing Daylight in Architecture
39 pages
Lighting Essentials for Beginners
No ratings yet
Lighting Essentials for Beginners
7 pages
Lighting For Residential Buildings (LG9) 2015 IET
No ratings yet
Lighting For Residential Buildings (LG9) 2015 IET
66 pages
Artificial Lighting
100% (1)
Artificial Lighting
37 pages
ILP Note On Obtrusive Lighting
100% (1)
ILP Note On Obtrusive Lighting
15 pages
Lighting Strategies for Art Preservation
No ratings yet
Lighting Strategies for Art Preservation
1 page
Kim Lighting Product Catalog Overview
No ratings yet
Kim Lighting Product Catalog Overview
28 pages
Artificial Lighting Practical
No ratings yet
Artificial Lighting Practical
4 pages
Chapter 2
No ratings yet
Chapter 2
40 pages
Beautiful Light: An Insider's Guide To LED Lighting in Homes and Gardens
No ratings yet
Beautiful Light: An Insider's Guide To LED Lighting in Homes and Gardens
14 pages
Silumin Proyectores Instalaciones Deportivas Tec-Mar
No ratings yet
Silumin Proyectores Instalaciones Deportivas Tec-Mar
30 pages
IESNA Lighting Handbook Overview
No ratings yet
IESNA Lighting Handbook Overview
4 pages
TeSynxrI LG0 2017
No ratings yet
TeSynxrI LG0 2017
39 pages
Lighting Calcs
100% (1)
Lighting Calcs
40 pages
1 LIGHTING STANDARDS (1) Mod 4
No ratings yet
1 LIGHTING STANDARDS (1) Mod 4
15 pages
Previews 1883732 Pre
No ratings yet
Previews 1883732 Pre
15 pages
Human-Centric Lighting Solutions
No ratings yet
Human-Centric Lighting Solutions
13 pages
Ansi Ies TM-35-19
No ratings yet
Ansi Ies TM-35-19
59 pages
Office & Industrial Lighting Guide
No ratings yet
Office & Industrial Lighting Guide
9 pages
IEC LED Lighting Standards Overview
No ratings yet
IEC LED Lighting Standards Overview
11 pages
LLFY-Step by Step in DIALux With OSRAM LEDs
100% (1)
LLFY-Step by Step in DIALux With OSRAM LEDs
30 pages
Effective Daylighting Design Strategies
No ratings yet
Effective Daylighting Design Strategies
9 pages
LIGHTING
No ratings yet
LIGHTING
51 pages
Light Architecture & Daylighting Solutions
No ratings yet
Light Architecture & Daylighting Solutions
3 pages
Outdoor Lighting Techniques Guide
No ratings yet
Outdoor Lighting Techniques Guide
28 pages
Foxboro 143DP DP Transmitter
No ratings yet
Foxboro 143DP DP Transmitter
32 pages
Exterior Workplace Lighting Strategies
No ratings yet
Exterior Workplace Lighting Strategies
3 pages
Lighting Handbook 08
No ratings yet
Lighting Handbook 08
324 pages
The Lighting Manual Zumtobel PDF
50% (2)
The Lighting Manual Zumtobel PDF
244 pages
Licht Hand Buch
No ratings yet
Licht Hand Buch
244 pages
Licht Hand Buch
No ratings yet
Licht Hand Buch
298 pages
Zumbotel Lighting Handbook
No ratings yet
Zumbotel Lighting Handbook
298 pages
Installation 1
No ratings yet
Installation 1
51 pages
Lecture 4. Lighting Design
No ratings yet
Lecture 4. Lighting Design
48 pages
Lighting Design Lecture Guide
100% (1)
Lighting Design Lecture Guide
85 pages
Light 02
No ratings yet
Light 02
34 pages
Uty 3 Reviewer
No ratings yet
Uty 3 Reviewer
31 pages
Module 4
No ratings yet
Module 4
22 pages
Architectural Lighting Systems Overview
No ratings yet
Architectural Lighting Systems Overview
9 pages
Lighting Guide for Decision-Makers
No ratings yet
Lighting Guide for Decision-Makers
43 pages
Lighting Fundamentals
No ratings yet
Lighting Fundamentals
31 pages
Lighting Fundamentals: U.S. EPA Green Lights Program
No ratings yet
Lighting Fundamentals: U.S. EPA Green Lights Program
19 pages
Summary
No ratings yet
Summary
21 pages
Paddle Sweep Owner's Manual
No ratings yet
Paddle Sweep Owner's Manual
103 pages
Roof Exhaust Fan: Installation & Operation
No ratings yet
Roof Exhaust Fan: Installation & Operation
24 pages
Pneg2062-050219 - Roof Stair
100% (1)
Pneg2062-050219 - Roof Stair
30 pages
Datasheet XPG SX8200 Pro en 20181017
No ratings yet
Datasheet XPG SX8200 Pro en 20181017
2 pages
Penelitian Politisasi Kampus
No ratings yet
Penelitian Politisasi Kampus
38 pages
U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration
No ratings yet
U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration
71 pages
DrumSchedule CTG
No ratings yet
DrumSchedule CTG
28 pages
THK Size Weight Per Sq. Foot Weight Per Piece: Galvanized Sheets
No ratings yet
THK Size Weight Per Sq. Foot Weight Per Piece: Galvanized Sheets
2 pages
Analisa Angin Sungai Duren
No ratings yet
Analisa Angin Sungai Duren
4 pages
Daftar Standard 18 10 2013
0% (1)
Daftar Standard 18 10 2013
7 pages
Ergonomics 1 MVC
100% (1)
Ergonomics 1 MVC
12 pages
RRB CMA Study Material by SRINIVASMech
100% (1)
RRB CMA Study Material by SRINIVASMech
270 pages
Els-512surwa S530-A3 p32 (7 Segment)
No ratings yet
Els-512surwa S530-A3 p32 (7 Segment)
5 pages
Light
No ratings yet
Light
25 pages
Environmental Science in Building R. McMullan
100% (2)
Environmental Science in Building R. McMullan
384 pages
WWW Mypractically Xyz 2021 12 Basic Science Physics Solved Mcqs Msbte HTML
No ratings yet
WWW Mypractically Xyz 2021 12 Basic Science Physics Solved Mcqs Msbte HTML
71 pages
Lumen Method for Lighting Design Guide
No ratings yet
Lumen Method for Lighting Design Guide
11 pages
Building Utilities 3 Terms
No ratings yet
Building Utilities 3 Terms
2 pages
ColorSource PAR Datasheet Revp
No ratings yet
ColorSource PAR Datasheet Revp
8 pages
Assignment/Internet Research in General Physics: Prepared By: Submitted To
No ratings yet
Assignment/Internet Research in General Physics: Prepared By: Submitted To
10 pages
Electrical Installation Ppt1
100% (2)
Electrical Installation Ppt1
27 pages
BA Series Specsheet Us
No ratings yet
BA Series Specsheet Us
5 pages
Highway Sign Visibility: Philip M. Garvey
No ratings yet
Highway Sign Visibility: Philip M. Garvey
17 pages
R.K. Rajput - Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering-Laxmi Publications (2012)
75% (8)
R.K. Rajput - Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering-Laxmi Publications (2012)
581 pages
En Erco Photo Metric Data
No ratings yet
En Erco Photo Metric Data
12 pages
Effects of Light On Materials in Collections
No ratings yet
Effects of Light On Materials in Collections
221 pages
LM-79 Test Report for DXpro Luminaires
No ratings yet
LM-79 Test Report for DXpro Luminaires
20 pages
Physics Capsule Watermark (1) .PDF 22
No ratings yet
Physics Capsule Watermark (1) .PDF 22
12 pages
Unit & Dimension Theory - E
No ratings yet
Unit & Dimension Theory - E
22 pages
Class XI First Lecture 4 Oct Photometry
No ratings yet
Class XI First Lecture 4 Oct Photometry
6 pages
Definition:: Basic Definitions, Concepts, and Principles
No ratings yet
Definition:: Basic Definitions, Concepts, and Principles
7 pages
Lighting Technology Guide
100% (1)
Lighting Technology Guide
13 pages
Iranian Petroleum Engineering Standards
No ratings yet
Iranian Petroleum Engineering Standards
67 pages
Understanding Sets and Set Operations
No ratings yet
Understanding Sets and Set Operations
98 pages
Light Measurement Handbook PDF
100% (1)
Light Measurement Handbook PDF
64 pages
Flash Cards Acoustic 2
No ratings yet
Flash Cards Acoustic 2
6 pages
MEASUREMENT
No ratings yet
MEASUREMENT
24 pages
NCERT Class 12 Physics Part 2 PDF
67% (3)
NCERT Class 12 Physics Part 2 PDF
254 pages
ARCH 666 Artificial Lighting-Selin Kocaman
No ratings yet
ARCH 666 Artificial Lighting-Selin Kocaman
59 pages
Cermax Eng Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Cermax Eng Guide PDF
44 pages